JP2022031423A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving an attention degree to a game.

SOLUTION: A pachinko machine includes an accessory device 150 provided with an open/close accessory 168. When being shifted to a second open/close execution mode, a round game in which variable ball entry control for opening/closing the open/close accessory 168 is performed at least once is executed. In the accessory device 150, a V winning sensor is provided. A game ball passing through the sensor triggers execution of a next round game. In addition, based on a detection result of winning and discharge of the game ball for the accessory device 150, processing for specifying a remaining situation of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is executed. In the present pachinko machine, separate processing described above is not performed for each round game, but one processing described above for multiple round games is performed.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a machine equipped with a variable ball entry device is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325811

Here, in a gaming machine, a device for increasing the degree of attention to a game is desired.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the degree of attention to gaming.

The present invention
A launching means that launches a game ball based on a launching operation by the player,
Variable entry that can be switched between the first aspect in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. Ball means and
A variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect.
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, the degree of attention to the game can be improved.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a front view of the back pack unit. (A) is a perspective view showing the configuration of the accessory device, and (b) is a plan view simply showing the configuration of the passage provided in the accessory device. It is a perspective view which shows by disassembling the accessory device. It is a perspective view which shows by disassembling the rotating body unit which constitutes the accessory device. It is a top view which shows the rotating body unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the result table, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the type table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the open timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt processing executed in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit / fail determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process under control. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the operation part in an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a round pattern table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an opening / closing pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each opening. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first distribution pattern table, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second distribution pattern table, and (c) is a combination of distribution patterns. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating distribution characteristic. It is a flowchart which shows the process for opening. It is a flowchart which shows the round update process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for passing through the accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the residual sphere determination processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the 2nd opening / closing execution mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the playability of each round game. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the remaining ball monitoring. In the second embodiment, it is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second opening / closing execution mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening / closing pattern table which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the residual sphere determination processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the 2nd opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the opening process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the 2nd round game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening timing table which concerns on 5th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the remaining ball determination process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the normal process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the flow of the game after the end of the 2nd opening / closing execution mode. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the flow of the game after the end of the 2nd opening / closing execution mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the remaining ball determination. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening timing table which concerns on 6th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the game control process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the pass / fail determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the residual sphere determination processing. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the flow of the game when the waiting time for opening a shutter elapses without the first opening / closing execution mode occurring. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the flow of the game when the first opening / closing execution mode occurs before the waiting time for opening a shutter elapses. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the opening waiting time and the flow of the game which concerns on the 1st opening / closing execution mode. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an exploded view of a rotating body unit constituting an accessory device according to a seventh embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the setting process for each round, and (b) is a flowchart showing the setting process of the opening / closing member. (A) and (b) are flowcharts showing round update processing, and (c) is a flowchart showing processing for a moving part in an accessory. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the 2nd opening / closing execution mode. It is a figure which shows another example of a gaming machine.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded manner. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right sides as the support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with one of the left and right side portions as the support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. It has a function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window 61. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided above the window unit 61 as a part of the various lamp units. Further, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game situation are provided.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper plate 71 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 72 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 71.

A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 72 in the front door frame 14. By operating the firing handle 60, the game ball is launched toward the game area from the game ball launch mechanism 53 provided below the game area in the inner frame 13. In this case, by changing the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 60, the firing intensity of the gaming ball launched toward the gaming area, that is, the firing momentum is changed.

The game area is formed on the game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 are attached to the surface of the game board 24, and a game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. Further, the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 form a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism by the player rotating the launch handle 60 is The guide rail 34 guides the player to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion faces the upper center of the game area on one side of the game area. Therefore, as the amount of rotation of the firing handle 60 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the side opposite to it. It shifts to the side of the department. The exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side portion of the game area.

In the range defined as the game area in the game board 24, a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning opening 35, a first operating port (first starting ball entry section) 38, a second operating port (second starting ball entry section) 39, an accessory device 150, a through gate 41, and a variable display unit. 42, a main display unit 43, a display unit for accessories 44, and the like are provided, respectively.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 35, the first operating port 38, the second operating port 39, and the accessory device 150, it is a detection sensor (first operating sensor 38a) arranged on the back side of the game board 24. , The second operation sensor 39c, the entrance sensor 179 (see FIG. 10 and the like)), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball enters the first operating port 38 or when a ball enters the second operating port 39, seven prize balls are paid out and entered into the general winning opening 35. When a ball is generated, eight prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the accessory device 150, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 39 is larger than the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 38, and the prize balls of both operating ports 38 and 39 are larger. The number may be different.

In addition, an out opening 45 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that has not entered various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area through the out opening 45. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 46 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the gaming area is continued without being carried out. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 45, the game ball into the accessory device 150, the first operating port 38, the second operating port 39 or the through gate 41 Entering a ball is also referred to as winning.

The accessory device 150 is arranged at a substantially central portion of the game board 24. The first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39 are arranged side by side in the lateral direction on the lower side of the accessory device 150 in the game board 24. Two first actuating openings 38 are provided on the left and right sides of the accessory device 150, and the second actuating openings 39 are arranged at positions sandwiched between the left and right first actuating openings 38. In relation to the bonus device 150, the left and right first operating ports 38 are arranged so as to sandwich the bonus device 150, and the game ball that did not win the bonus device 150 is one of the first operating ports. It is possible to reach 38 (winning is possible). Further, the lateral distance between the first operating port 38 and the accessory device 150 is equal to or larger than the diameter of one game ball, and the space between the first operating port 38 and the accessory device 150 is set. The game ball can flow down.

Further, the second actuating port 39 is arranged below the accessory device 150. The second operating port 39 is arranged slightly below both the first operating ports 38, and the game ball that did not enter the accessory device 150 or the first operating port 38 can reach the second operating port 39. (A ball can be entered).

The second operating port 39 is provided with an electric accessory 39a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 39a is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 39b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric accessory drive unit 39b to be in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) and in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state). It is placed in either the open state (support state or guide state). When the electric accessory 39a is closed, the game ball cannot win a prize in the second operating port 39, and when the electric accessory 39a is opened, a prize can be won in the second operating port 39.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and there are a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in the second operating port 39, and a state in which a prize is not impossible but a prize is less likely to occur than in a state in which the above-mentioned prize is likely to occur. The electric accessory 39a may be switched. Further, the electric accessory 39a may be inadequate, and switching between a state in which a prize is likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur may be performed by the displacement of the second operating port 39 itself.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided on the decorative member 47 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 47 extends from the surface of the gaming board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 47 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further, the front surface of the decorative member 47 faces the window panel 62. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 47.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 47. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball can be seen in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

On the main display unit 43, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each of the operating ports 38 and 39 is clearly indicated by the display of a pattern or the like.

The main display unit 43 is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as CRT and dot matrix. Further, as the pattern displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed. The displayed configuration can be considered.

In the accessory display unit 44, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the through gate 41, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 41 is obtained. Explicitly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 41 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After the is stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operating port 39 is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 42 is provided with a symbol display device 51 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol which is a kind of symbol. The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 51 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

In the lower portion of the main display unit 43 of the decorative member 47, a first reserved light emitting unit 54 and a second reserved light emitting unit 55 corresponding to the main display unit 43 are provided. The first reserved light emitting unit 54 has a plurality of light emitting units (4 in detail) arranged side by side, and the number of game balls winning in the first operating port 38 is reserved up to four, and the first reserved light emitting unit 54 is reserved. The number of holdings is displayed by lighting the unit 54. The second reserved light emitting unit 55 has a plurality of light emitting units (4 in detail) arranged side by side, and the number of game balls winning in the second operating port 39 is reserved up to four, and the second reserved light emitting unit 55 is reserved. The number of holdings is displayed by lighting the unit 55. Further, in the lower portion of the accessory display unit 44 of the decorative member 47, a third reserved light emitting unit 56 corresponding to the accessory display unit 44 is provided. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 41 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the third holding light emitting unit 56. It should be noted that a configuration or the like may be configured in which a part or all of the reserved light emitting units 54 to 56 is displayed by a part of the symbol display device 51.

The accessory device 150 is opened on condition that the game ball enters any of the operating ports 38 and 39, and the game ball can enter the accessory device 150. When a game ball enters the accessory device 150 and the game ball further enters the V winning opening provided in the accessory device 150, it is detected by the V winning sensor 192, which will be described later, and a big hit state is established.

Here, the configuration of the accessory device 150 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. 6 (a) is a perspective view of the accessory device 150, FIG. 6 (b) is a plan view simply showing the configuration of a passage provided in the accessory device 150, and FIG. 7 is a plan view of the accessory device 150. It is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of a rotating body unit 180 constituting the accessory device 150, and FIG. 9 is a plan view of the rotating body unit 180.

The accessory device 150 is roughly divided into an accessory unit 160 and a rotating body unit 180. As shown in FIG. 7, the accessory unit 160 includes a base frame 161 and the flange 162 of the base frame 161 is screwed and fixed to the game board 24. The base frame 161 is vertically partitioned by a ball receiving plate 163 extending in the front-rear direction, and an upper opening 164 and a lower opening 165 penetrating the front and rear are formed.

A ceiling member 167 having a predetermined thickness is attached above the upper opening 164 on the front surface of the base frame 161. The variable display unit 42 is formed on the ceiling member 167, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is installed so as to face the front of the gaming machine.

A pair of opening / closing accessories 168 having the same thickness as the ceiling member 167 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper opening 164 in the base frame 161. A passage forming member 171 and a drive unit fixing plate 172 are provided on the back surface side of the base frame 161. A pair of opening / closing accessory drive units 173 (electromagnetic solenoid) are attached to the back surface of the drive unit fixing plate 172. There is. One end of the link 176 provided through the passage forming member 171 and the drive unit fixing plate 172 is connected to the opening / closing accessory drive unit 173, and the other end of the link 176 is connected to the shaft portion of the opening / closing accessory 168. It is linked. Therefore, the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened by driving the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173.

Explaining the opening operation in detail, each opening / closing accessory 168 stands upward when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is not driven (excited), and the respective tip portions are close to the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. On the other hand, when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven (excited), each opening / closing accessory 168 opens outward, and a game ball is located between the tip of each opening / closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. There is a gap larger than one. With such a configuration, it is possible to enter the game ball into the accessory device 150 only when each opening / closing accessory 168 is opened and the accessory device 150 is in the open state. Even when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is not driven (excited) (when the opening / closing accessory 168 stands upright), when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven (excited). It suffices if it is more difficult to enter the ball into the accessory device 150 than (when the opening / closing accessory 168 is open to the outside), and it is useful when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is not driven (excited). It may be configured so that the ball can enter the object device 150. For example, when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is being driven, the gap between the tip of the opening / closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167 is about one game ball, and the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 It is conceivable that the same gap will be larger when driven.

Further, the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is configured so as not to be visible from the front of the gaming machine due to the passage forming member 171 and the driving unit fixing plate 172, and the back surface side of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is covered by the cover member 174. There is.

A front frame 175 is attached to the edge of the lower opening 165 on the front surface of the base frame 161. The extending wall 175a formed on the upper part of the front frame 175 extends upward from the ball receiving plate 163 of the base frame 161 and is in front of the game ball reaching on the ball receiving plate 163 by the extending wall 175a. Jumping out to is regulated.

The passage forming member 171 is formed with a passage plate 177 extending in the front-rear direction and connected to the ball receiving plate 163, and a game ball passage 178 extending in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the passage plate 177 (FIG. FIG. 6 (b)). The passage plate 177 is inclined downward toward the game ball passage 178, and the width is further narrowed toward the game ball passage 178, so that the game ball that reaches the ball receiving plate 163 is a game ball. You will be guided to the passage 178. The game ball guided to the game ball passage 178 flows down the game ball passage 178. An entrance sensor 179 is provided on the entrance side of the game ball passage 178, and the game ball that has entered the accessory device 150 always and immediately passes through the entrance sensor 179. As a result, the entry of the game ball into the accessory device 150 is detected. The inlet sensor 179 is composed of a well-known proximity sensor.

A rotating body unit 180 is attached to the accessory unit 160 so as to be located below the passage forming member 171. As shown in FIG. 8, the rotating body unit 180 includes a guide passage forming member 181 and a discharge passage forming member 191.

The guide passage forming member 181 is formed with a recess 182 that is recessed downward in the substantially center thereof. The recess 182 has a circular shape in a plan view. Then, an annular guide passage 183 is formed along the outer edge of the upper surface opening of the recess 182. The guide passage 183 is symmetrical, and is inclined so as to be lower from the center on the back side toward the center on the front side. The front center of the guide passage 183 is located at the lower end portion of the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161. The center of the back side of the guidance passage 183 is located vertically below the game ball passage 178 of the accessory unit 160. The passage wall 183a forming the center of the back side of the guide passage 183 is taller than the surrounding passage wall 183a, and a passage cover 184 extending in the horizontal direction is formed above the guide passage 183 on the back side. .. However, the entrance opening 184a is formed in the passage cover 184, and in a plan view (see FIG. 9), the back side portion of the guidance passage 183 is configured so that only the back side center is exposed. Since the entrance opening 184a overlaps with the exit of the game ball passage 178, the game ball flowing down the game ball passage 178 surely reaches the center of the back side of the guide passage 183.

A ball distribution portion 185 is formed in the center of the back side of the guide passage 183. The ball distribution portion 185 has an inclined surface 185a that inclines downward from the right side to the left side. The game ball that has reached the ball distribution unit 185 is guided to the guidance passage 183 on the left side along the inclination of the inclined surface 185a. Then, by rolling along the inclination of the guidance passage 183, the guide passage 183 is guided to the front side. On the front side of the guide passage 183, a lead-out portion 186 inclined toward the recess 182 side is formed.

The concave portion 182 is formed with a V winning opening 182a on the bottom surface thereof. The V winning opening 182a leads to the V winning passage 191a formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game ball entering the V winning opening 182a is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning passage 191a. In this case, the V winning sensor 192 is provided in the V winning passage 191a, and the game ball passing through the V winning passage 191a is detected by the V winning sensor 192.

Further, an outlet 182b is formed on the side surface of the recess 182. The outlet 182b leads to the outlet passage 191b formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game ball entering the outlet 182b is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the outlet passage 191b. In this case, the disengagement sensor 193 is provided in the disengagement passage 191b, and the game ball passing through the disengagement passage 191b is detected by the disengagement sensor 193. The V winning sensor 192 and the disconnection sensor 193 are composed of well-known proximity sensors. Further, the game ball discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning passage 191a and the disengagement passage 191b is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through a discharge passage (not shown).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the accessory device 150 is not provided with a discharge route other than the route passing through the V winning passage 191a or the exit passage 191b, and the game ball that has won the prize in the accessory device 150 is the accessory. When it is discharged to the outside of the device 150, it always passes through either the V winning passage 191a or the disconnection passage 191b.

A drive unit 194 for a rotating body is attached to the discharge passage forming member 191 from below, and the output shaft 194a extending in the vertical direction of the drive unit 194 for the rotating body is a discharge passage forming member 191 and an induction passage forming member 181. Penetrates. The rotating body 201 is fixed to the output shaft 194a. The drive unit 194 for the rotating body may be used as a stepping motor.

The rotating body 201 has a substantially disk shape having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the recess 182 of the guide passage forming member 181, and is located in the recess 182. Then, the rotating body 201 rotates clockwise with the driving of the rotating body driving unit 194. Ten ball guide portions 202 recessed inward are formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body 201, and these ball guide portions 202 are arranged at equal intervals. Of these, nine ball guides 202 are bottomed out outlet guides 203, and one ball guide 202 is a bottomless V winning opening guide 204. The bottom surface of the exit guide portion 203 is inclined so as to be lower toward the outside. Each ball guide unit 202 has a size sufficient to accommodate one game ball, and the game ball derived from the lead-out unit 186 of the guide passage 183 enters any of the ball guide units 202. In this case, the game ball that has entered the V winning opening guide portion 204 reaches the upper part of the V winning opening 182a as the rotating body 201 rotates, and falls from the V winning opening 182a into the V winning passage 191a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the outlet guide portion 203 reaches the side of the outlet 182b as the rotating body 201 rotates, and enters the exit passage 191b from the outlet 182b.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation position detection sensor 196 is provided in order to grasp the rotation position of the rotating body 201. The rotation position detection sensor 196 has a pair of arm portions 196a and 196b facing each other at predetermined intervals, and a light emitting element is disposed in one arm portion 196a and the light emitting element in the other arm portion 196b. A light receiving element is arranged at the opposite position. The rotation position detection sensor 196 is provided on the sensor board 197, and the sensor board 197 is driven for a rotating body between both arm portions 196a and 196b (between the light emitting element and the light receiving element) of the rotation position detection sensor 196. The cut van 198 provided on the output shaft 194a of the portion 194 is fixed to the discharge passage forming member 191 so as to be located there.

The cut van 198 has a substantially donut shape and rotates with the rotation of the output shaft 194a. However, the notch 198a is formed so as to be discontinuous. Therefore, the light from the light emitting element of the rotation position detection sensor 196 is basically blocked by the cut van 198, and only when the notch portion 198a passes between both arm portions 196a and 196b with the rotation of the output shaft 194a, the light from the light emitting element Light reaches the light receiving element. Then, by forming the notch portion 198a corresponding to the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 on the outer periphery of the rotating body 201, it is possible to monitor whether or not the light receiving element has detected the light from the light emitting element. , The rotation position of the rotating body 201 can be grasped. Incidentally, when the V winning opening guide portion 204 passes on the front side of the lead-out portion 186, the notch portion 198a passes between both arm portions 196a and 196b.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is provided on the left and right side of the guide passage 183, more specifically, on the left side of the guide passage 183 on which the outlet 182b is formed. .. The first distribution member 300 is arranged above the disengagement passage 191b as a bottom portion forming a part of the floor portion of the guide passage 183. The first distribution member 300 is connected to the first distribution drive unit 300a (electromagnetic solenoid), and by driving and controlling the first distribution drive unit 300a, one of the floor portions of the induction passage 183. It is switched between a non-distribution state constituting the portion and a distribution state in which the rear end of the first distribution member 300 is rotated downward and tilted downward toward the disengagement passage 191b side.

According to the above configuration, when the first distribution driving unit 300a is not driven (not in the excited state) and the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distribution state, it is on the left side in the induction passage 183. The distributed game ball passes over the first distribution member 300 with the first distribution member 300 as the floor portion, and reaches any of the ball guide portions 202 in the rotating body 201. On the other hand, when the first distribution drive unit 300a is driven (excited state) and the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the first distribution member 300 is inclined toward the lower disengagement passage 191b. Then, the game ball passing over the first distribution member 300 is guided to the disengagement passage 191b as it is without reaching the rotating body 201. Therefore, the V winning probability (probability detected by the V winning sensor 192) changes depending on the state of the first distribution member 300.

Further, in the present embodiment, a warp passage 210 for directly guiding the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage 178 to the V winning passage 191a is provided. The warp passage 210 includes a substantially columnar passage cover 211 and a passage forming portion 212 that divides the internal space of the passage cover 211 into a passage shape to form a spherical passage. The passage cover 211 is formed of a transparent (translucent) synthetic resin, and a spiral passage 213 is formed inside the passage cover 211 by the inner peripheral wall surface of the passage cover 211 and the passage forming portion 212. .. One game ball can pass through the spiral passage 213.

At the upper part of the passage cover 211, an entrance guide portion 215 for guiding the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage 178 to the spiral passage 213 is provided. The entrance guide portion 215 is arranged corresponding to a portion of the passage wall 183a of the guide passage 183, which is behind the ball distribution portion 185. Specifically, an opening (not shown) opened toward the rear is formed in a portion of the passage wall 183a behind the ball distribution portion 185, and the entrance guide portion 215 is formed in the opening. The entrance is in communication. The exit portion of the entrance guide portion 215 communicates with the spiral passage 213 through the warp entrance portion 214, and the floor surface of the entrance guide portion 215 is inclined downward toward the spiral passage 213.

At the lower part of the passage cover 211, a warp outlet portion 216 for discharging the game ball passing through the spiral passage 213 to the outside of the passage cover 211 is formed. In front of the warp outlet portion 216, an exit guide portion 217 is provided which extends downward in an inclined manner toward the front and guides the game ball discharged from the warp outlet portion 216 to the discharge passage forming member 191. ing. The discharge passage forming member 191 is formed with a V guide passage 260 that guides the game ball toward the V winning passage 191a, and the exit portion of the exit guide portion 217 is formed at the rear end portion 261 of the V guide passage 260. Is communicating. The V-guide passage 260 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the V-winning passage 191a, and the front end 262 of the V-guide passage 260 is communicated with the V-winning passage 191a. The warp inlet portion 214, the entrance guide portion 215, the warp outlet portion 216, the exit guide portion 217, and the V guide passage 260 are each configured to allow one game ball to pass through.

With the above configuration, when the game ball that has reached the guidance passage 183 is guided to the warp passage 210 side, it is led out to the V guidance passage 260 through the spiral passage 213 in the warp passage 210. Then, the game ball passes through the V guidance passage 260, enters the V winning passage 191a, and is detected by the V winning sensor 192 (V winning).

Here, in front of the entrance guide portion 215 in the warp passage 210, the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage 178 is placed on the entrance guide portion 215 (warp passage 210) side and the ball distribution portion 185 (guide passage 183 on the left side). A second distribution member 310 that can be distributed to either side is provided. The second distribution member 310 is connected to the second distribution drive unit 310a (electromagnetic solenoid), and the second distribution drive unit 310a is driven and controlled to the front of the inlet guide unit 215. It switches between a non-distribution state in which it is arranged and a distribution state in which it is arranged above it and is not arranged in front of the entrance guide portion 215.

Further, at an intermediate position of the entrance guide portion 215 between the second distribution member 310 and the warp inlet portion 214 of the warp passage 210, a shutter 221 for switching whether or not the game ball can flow into the warp inlet portion 214 is provided. It is provided. The shutter 221 is connected to the shutter drive unit 221a (electromagnetic solenoid), and by driving and controlling the shutter drive unit 221a, the shutter 221 is arranged in front of the inlet guide unit 215 and is arranged in front of the warp inlet unit 214. A closed state that regulates the inflow of game balls to the warp inlet (closes the warp inlet 214), and allows the inflow of the game balls into the warp inlet 214 that is located above it (warp inlet 214). It switches to the open state (open).

According to the above configuration, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is not driven (not in the excited state) and the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state, the game ball is the entrance guide unit 215. After being distributed to the ball distribution unit 185 side, it goes down the guidance passage 183 on the left side. On the other hand, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is driven (excited state) and the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, the game ball can flow into the entrance guide unit 215 and is used for the entrance. It is distributed to the guide unit 215 side.

At that time, when the shutter drive unit 221a is driven (excited state) and the shutter 221 is in the open state, the game ball on the entrance guide unit 215 passes through the warp inlet portion 214 and is a spiral passage. It enters 213 and is led out to the V winning passage 191a through the exit guide portion 217 and the V guidance passage 260. That is, the V prize is directly won without going through the distribution by the rotating body 201. On the contrary, when the shutter drive unit 221a is not driven (not in the excited state) and the shutter 221 is in the closed state, the game ball stops by abutting on the shutter 221 and the warp inlet portion 214. The inflow of game balls to is restricted. This state is continued until the shutter 221 is opened, and the game ball is stored in the accessory device 150.

Here, both the second distribution member 310 and the rotating body 201 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, but the second distribution member 310 is arranged behind the rotating body 201 and is forward. The visibility from the rotating body 201 is lower than that of the rotating body 201. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second distribution member 310 from being hit at the timing of distribution to the entrance guide portion 215 side. On the other hand, with respect to the rotating body 201, it is possible to easily see how the game balls are distributed, to increase the interest in the rotating body 201 and to improve its presence.

The ball distribution portion 185 in the center of the back side of the guidance passage 183 has a downward inclined surface so that the game ball can be distributed not only to the left side but also to the rear. At this time, the positional relationship between the second distribution member 310, which is in the non-distribution state, is set so as to be located on the front (front) side of the downwardly inclined surface. As a result, the second distribution member 310 in the non-distribution state suppresses the occurrence of an event in which the game ball stays at an intermediate position on the downhill inclined surface.

In the present embodiment, the period until the game ball stored in front of the warp inlet portion 214 reaches the V winning sensor 192 through the warp passage 210 (spiral passage 213) is about 2 sec. The passage length is set in. Further, the passage length and the rotation speed of the rotating body 201 are such that the period until the game ball winning the accessory device 150 reaches the V winning sensor 192 via the guidance passage 183 and the rotating body 201 on the left side is about 3 sec. Is set. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the outlet 182b is located closer to the lead-out portion 186 than the V winning opening 182a when viewed in the rotation direction (clockwise) of the rotating body 201. Therefore, the period until the game ball winning the accessory device 150 reaches the disengagement sensor 193 via the left guide passage 183 and the rotating body 201 (until it is discharged from the accessory device 150 via the disengagement sensor 193). The period) is shorter than the period until the V winning sensor 192 is reached via the guide passage 183 on the left side and the rotating body 201.

The game ball entered in the accessory device 150 described above enters the game ball passage 178 by rolling on the ball receiving plate 163. In this case, the game ball is detected by the entrance sensor 179. The game ball that has flowed down the game ball passage 178 reaches the ball distribution portion 185 formed in the center of the back side of the guidance passage 183. Then, the second distribution member 310 is distributed to the left guidance passage 183 on condition that the distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state. After that, it is guided to the lead-out unit 186 by rolling on the guide passage 183 on the left side. The game ball guided to the lead-out unit 186 is led out into the recess 182 by rolling along the inclination of the lead-out unit 186. However, in order for the game ball rolling in the left guidance passage 183 to reach the recess 182, it is a condition that the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distribution state. That is, the game ball guided to the guide passage 183 on the left side may be led out to the recess 182 side, or may be led out to the outlet 182b as it is.

The rotating body 201 is rotating in the recess 182, and the game ball led out into the recess 182 and entering the outlet guide portion 203 is guided to the outlet 182b. In this case, the game ball is detected by the detachment sensor 193. On the other hand, the game ball led out into the recess 182 and entering the V winning opening guide portion 204 is guided to the V winning opening 182a. In this case, the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192.

When the game ball reaches the ball distribution unit 185, if the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, it is distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 side. In the present embodiment, when the game ball reaches the ball distribution unit 185 while the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, the ball is always distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 side. The shape of the distribution unit 185 is set. When the game ball is distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 and the shutter 221 is in the closed state, as described above, the game is played at the contact position with the shutter 221 (upstream of the warp entrance portion 214). The ball stops and is stored in the accessory device 150 in that state. After that, when the shutter 221 is displaced to the open state, the game ball flows into the spiral passage 213 through the warp inlet portion 214 and moves toward the V winning sensor 192.

Since one of the 10 ball guide portions 202 has the V winning opening guide portion 204, the game ball that has entered the recess 182 of the accessory device 150 has a 1/10 chance of being the V winning opening 182a. Will enter. Further, when the game balls are detected by the V winning sensor 192 and the removal sensor 193, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 71. Further, the movement of the gaming ball on the rotating body unit 180 can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the opening of the front frame 175 and the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161.

However, the number of ball guide units 202, the number of V winning opening guide units 204, etc. are not limited to those described above. It may be configured to win a V with a probability of / 6, or it may be configured to win a V with another probability.

The power lines and signal lines of the sensors 179, 192, 193, 196 and the like in the above-mentioned accessory device 150 and the drive units 173, 221a, 300a, 310a, 194 and the like are relays attached to the guide passage forming member 181. It is connected to the terminal board 199. Then, these signal lines are bundled as a harness and connected to a main control device described later, and the main control device detects the incoming ball and controls the drive of the drive unit. However, a configuration in which a part or all of these is performed on the effect control device side, which will be described later, which is a control device on the sub side, may be used.

In the symbol display device 51, notification that the game ball enters any of the operating ports 38 and 39 and the accessory device 150 is in the open state, notification when the game ball enters the accessory device 150, and so on. In addition to the notification during the normal game state, such as notification of the distribution result, notification of the distribution status in the rotating body 201, notification of the occurrence of the jackpot state by detecting the game ball with the V winning sensor 192, etc., the jackpot state It also notifies the round effect inside and an error notification when an abnormality is detected. It should be noted that the content of these effects may be such that the player can clearly grasp each game situation.

Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the game board 24 is provided with a vibration detection sensor 240 and a magnet detection sensor 241 as abnormality detecting means. The vibration detection sensor 240 and the magnet detection sensor 241 are installed around the accessory device 150. These detection sensors 240 and 241 are electrically connected to the main control device 81, detect vibration and magnets (magnetism) in a situation where operating power (operating voltage) is supplied from the main control device 81, and at the same time, detect vibration and magnetism. The detection result is output to the main control device 81.

As already explained, since the accessory device 150 distributes to the V prize, the flow of the game ball is changed by giving vibration to the accessory device 150 or attracting the game ball by a magnet, and the game is played. It is assumed that a fraudulent act is attempted to guide the ball to the V winning opening guide unit 204. On the other hand, by providing the detection sensors 240 and 241, it is possible to grasp when the fraudulent act is performed.

The positions of the detection sensors 240 and 241 are arbitrary as long as they can detect vibration and magnetism. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing fraudulent acts against the accessory device 150, it is preferable that the accessory device 150 is arranged closer to the accessory device 150.

The main control device 81 to which the detection sensors 240 and 241 are connected has a game stop function for stopping the subsequent game when vibration or a magnet is detected by the detection sensors 240 and 241.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 83 made of the above. The board box 83 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), whereby the substrate box 83 is sealed. Since they are inseparably connected by the box coupling portions 85, the substrate box 83 needs to be destroyed or partially cut when the internal space of the substrate box 83 is opened. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portions of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling processing.

Any configuration can be applied to the box joint portion 85 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box joint portion 85, the box base can be connected to the box base. It is designed so that it cannot be opened with the box cover. The joining process by the box joining portion 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the joining, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the illegal opening is performed. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions 85. Then, when the board box 83 is opened, such as when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and another box coupling portion 85 are used. Cut the connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box 83 and the box cover are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 83 has been opened illegally by looking at the board box 83.

A plurality of bonding pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the board box 83 so as to project to the side thereof. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the coupling piece 86 and the coupling piece 87 form a board box 83 and a mounting base. The binding process is performed between.

As a trace means for detecting the unauthorized opening of the board box 83, the sealing seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing seal is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information to a ring wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

The effect control device 82 includes an effect control board that controls voice, lamp display, and a display control device (not shown) according to instructions from the main control device 81, and the effect control board is a substrate box made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed in 84 and configured.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism unit 92 and a control device collective unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism unit 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover unit 94, and is a tank 95 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game field are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. It is equipped with a payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game ball paid out from the payout device 96 is discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, a back pack substrate 92a is installed in the payout mechanism unit 92 (see FIG. 5). For example, a main power supply of 24 volts AC is supplied to the back pack board 92a, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 92b.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when a game ball is insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time it is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and a state transition such as an opening / closing execution mode. An output terminal for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state) is provided. Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state of the frame side is output to the management control device on the playground side. It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is not required in a so-called cash machine.

The control device collective unit 93 includes a payout control device 97, a power supply, and a launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply and launch control device 98 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured by accommodating a payout control board that controls the payout device 96 in a board box. In this case, the same fraud suppression means as the board box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 97.

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by accommodating a power supply and a launch control board in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and is further determined by a player. The launch of the game ball is controlled by operating the firing handle 60. The power supply and emission control device 98 are provided with a RAM erasing switch 98a (see FIG. 5). This pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data so that it can maintain the state at the time of power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure and can return to the state at the time of power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become. Therefore, if only the power switch 92b is operated to shut off the power as in the case of the end of business of the amusement park, the state before the shutoff is stored and retained, but the power switch 92b is operated while pressing the RAM erase switch 98a. RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

A main control device 81, an effect control device 82, and a display control device 100 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame as described above, and the back pack unit includes a payout mechanism unit including a payout device 96, a payout control device 97, a power supply, and a launch control. The device 98 is mounted.

The main control device 81 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 115 that monitors the power supply. In the main control device 81, the board box accommodating the main control board 111 and the like may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. .. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is configured, or an adhesive layer is used as an adhesion target at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111. The MPU 112 is a ROM 113 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 112, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 113 is executed. A certain RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 112, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 115 and a payout control device 97 provided in the main control device 81 are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. In this case, a power supply having a function of supplying operating power and a launch control device 98 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 115, and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115.

Further, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. The various sensors include the first operating sensor 38a and the second operating sensor 39c that detect the winning of both operating ports 38 and 39, as well as the general winning opening as a winning detection sensor that detects the winning of other winning portions. A sensor 35a for detecting a prize in the 35, a sensor 41a for detecting a prize in the through gate 41, and the like are provided. Further, various sensors include an entrance sensor 179, a V winning sensor 192, a detachment sensor 193, a rotation position detection sensor 196, and the like in the accessory device 150. Based on the detection results of these various sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, 196, the MPU 112 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion, and positions the rotating body 201. To grasp. Further, in the MPU 112, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. Further, various sensors include a vibration detection sensor 240 for detecting vibration and a magnet detection sensor 241 for detecting a magnet. The MPU 112 performs abnormality monitoring based on the detection results of these detection sensors 240 and 241.

A power failure monitoring board 115, a payout control device 97, an effect control device 82, and the like are connected to the output side of the MPU 112. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the winning determination result for the winning ball corresponding to the prize.

Various commands for effect are output to the effect control device 82. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 112, as various drive units, an electric accessory drive unit 39b, an opening / closing accessory drive unit 173, a first distribution drive unit 300a, a second distribution drive unit 310a, a shutter drive unit 221a, and rotation. The body drive unit 194 and the like are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when a prize is generated in any of the operating ports 38 and 39, or when the opening / closing execution mode based on the winning in the V winning sensor 192 is entered, the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 of the accessory device 150 is driven. Under control, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing accessory 168 is executed. Further, in these cases, the drive control of both distribution drive units 300a and 310a is performed, and the drive control of the rotating body drive unit 194 is performed.

Further, when the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of both operating ports 38 and 39 is performed, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 112. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 39a is clearly indicated, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 112.

The power failure monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power supply and launch control device 98, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 98. The power failure monitoring board 115 determines that a power failure (power interruption) has occurred when the output voltage from the power supply and launch control device 98 is less than 22 volts, and sends a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-massable) provided in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81. Output to the interrupt terminal). As a result, the main control device 81 recognizes the occurrence of a power failure and immediately executes the NMI interrupt process, and further executes the power failure process based on this. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply and the launch control device 98 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply and the launch control device 98 are provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storage retention is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81.

Further, the power supply and the launch control device 98 are responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied. In this case, the game ball launch mechanism 53 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 24, a ball feeding device for supplying the game balls stored in the precision plate 71 onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is equipped with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34, and the game ball is supplied with a drive signal from the power supply and the launch control device 98 to the solenoid. Be fired.

The effect control device 82 includes an effect control board 141 on which the MPU 142 is mounted. The MPU 142 is a ROM 143 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 142, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 143 is executed. A certain RAM 144, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built-in.

The MPU 142 drives and controls various light emitting units 54 to 56, 63 and a speaker unit 64 based on a command received from the main control device 81. Further, the command as a result of analyzing these commands is transmitted to the display control device 100. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 151 on which an MPU 152, which is an element in which a program ROM 153 and a work RAM 154 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 155, a character ROM 156, and a video RAM 157, respectively, are mounted. It is equipped with.

The MPU 152 analyzes various commands received from the effect control device 82 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 155 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 155).

The program ROM 153 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 152, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information. The work RAM 154 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 152, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. Is.

The VDP 155 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built in the symbol display device 51. Since the VDP 155 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 155 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 152, the video RAM 157, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 157 from the character ROM 156 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 51.

The character ROM 156 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 51. The character ROM 156 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The video RAM 157 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display content of the symbol display device 51 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 157.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 112 of the main control device 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 112 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 43, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 51, a display setting of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots and the jackpot used for determining the jackpot type such as whether or not to open / close the opening / closing accessory 168. The type counter C2, the open type counter CS for setting the waiting period from the winning to the open state when the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39, and the opening type counter CS. The random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 39a of the second operating port 39 is set to the electric service open state is used.

Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114. In the lottery counter buffer 114a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS is stored as acquired information when a prize is awarded to the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as a means.

The holding ball storage area 114b includes a holding area RE including a holding area Ra for a first result display unit and a holding area Rb for a second result display unit, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb are provided with a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively, and a lottery counter is provided according to the winning history of the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39, respectively. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS stored in the buffer 114a is stored in any of the areas as hold information. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → the third area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area. By providing each of the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39 can be reserved and stored. Further, the reserved ball storage area 114b is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and the total reserved number storage area holds the winning history of the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. Information for identifying is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the hold area RE when the variable display of the main display unit 43 is started, and the execution area AE is at the start of one game. Based on various numerical information stored in, the hit / fail judgment is performed.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 99, the maximum value (that is, 99) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 99). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 39. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the display unit.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a result table (game result information group) in the result table storage area 113a as the result table storage area 113a as the win / loss information group storage means in the ROM 113.

Here, the contents of the result table will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (a).

As shown in FIG. 12A, the result table is set as a game result, a loss result, a direct hit result, and a normal opening result. The normal opening result is a game result in which the opening / closing accessory 168 in the accessory device 150 is put into the open state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39. In the present embodiment, when a prize is generated in the first operating port 38, the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened once, and when a winning is generated in the second operating port 39, the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened twice. It is set to be. The disengagement result is a result that the opening / closing accessory 168 is not opened even when the operating ports 38 and 39 are won. In this case, the accessory device 150 cannot be awarded a prize, and the transition to the jackpot state (open / close execution mode) cannot be expected. The direct hit result is the result of shifting to the big hit state (opening / closing execution mode) only when the operating ports 38 and 39 are won, and the winning of the accessory device 150 is of course even if the V winning is not generated. , Move to the jackpot state as described above.

In the following, in order to distinguish between the open / close execution mode based on the normal opening result and the open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result (including both the one due to the direct hit result and the one due to the occurrence of the V prize), the former Is referred to as a "first open / close execution mode", and the latter may be referred to as a "second open / close execution mode".

Of the jackpot random number counters C1 (0 to 99), the number of random number values that result in a loss is one, the number of random number values that result in a direct hit is one, and the others are normally open results. It is the corresponding value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, based on the winning of both operating ports 38 and 39, the number of opening / closing accessories 168 corresponding to the operating ports 38 and 39 is opened with a probability of 98/100, and 1/100. Although the opening / closing accessory 168 is not opened with the probability of, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed without passing the V prize, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is not opened with the probability of 1/100 and the opening / closing execution mode is entered. No migration is done.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that no direct hit result or loss result is provided. However, by including these results, the game can be diversified, and especially if a direct hit result is provided, a game in which a prize is not frequently generated in the accessory device 150 due to nail adjustment or the like. Even if it is a table, it is expected that a big hit state will occur, and even if it is such a game table, it is possible to expect the effect of increasing the motivation for the game.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 39. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the display unit.

The value of the random number that sets the type of the jackpot result is stored as a type table (game type information group) in the various table storage areas 113d as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 113.

Here, the contents of the type table will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (b).

As shown in FIG. 12B, 16R (round) continuation mode and continuation rate fluctuation mode are set as the types of jackpot results in the type table. The 16R continuation mode indicates a mode in which 16 round games are executed, and the continuation rate fluctuation mode indicates a mode in which the continuation rate to the next round game changes in the round game.

Here, the round game means (1) that the opening / closing accessory 168 has been opened a predetermined upper limit opening number of times (in other words, the total opening time reaches a predetermined upper limit opening time). , (2) The game continues until one of the conditions of (2) the total number of winning balls to the accessory device 150 reaches a predetermined upper limit is satisfied. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened / closed 19 times in one round game, and the maximum number of winnings in one round game is set to nine.

The maximum number of round games played in each jackpot type is predetermined, and specifically, the maximum number of round games is set to 16 regardless of the jackpot result in any mode. In this case, in the 16R continuation mode, 16 round games are set to be continued unconditionally. On the other hand, in the continuation rate fluctuation mode, the round game is set to continue when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. The continuation condition is that the game ball wins a prize in the accessory device 150 during the round game, and the game ball wins a V prize.

The open type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The open type counter CS is updated periodically. However, this update timing is set to be different from the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 and jackpot type counter C2. Therefore, fraudulent acts of reading the update timing of each counter value by some method are less likely to occur. The updated open type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39, similarly to the other counters C1 and C2. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 39. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the display unit.

The value of the random number that sets the waiting time (opening timing) from the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 to the opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is the opening timing table in the opening timing table storage area 113c as the standby information group storage means in the ROM 113. It is stored as (waiting period information group).

Here, the contents of the opening timing table will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (c).

As shown in FIG. 12 (c), as the opening timing, a plurality of types of waiting times (waiting periods) from the winning timing to the operating ports 38 and 39 (or the closing timing of the previous opening / closing accessory 168) are set. ing. More specifically, 20 types of standby times are set from 0.5 sec to 2.4 sec in increments of 0.1 sec. The interval (0.1 sec) between each of these times is set to be shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec cycle) of the game ball, and a prize is won in the accessory device 150 by so-called stop striking or the like. The act of intentionally changing (increasing) the probability is less likely to occur.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value (that is, 250), and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric accessory holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41.

Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 39a to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric accessory 39a is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric accessory 39a is not controlled to the open state.

In this embodiment, the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 39a is set so as not to be different regardless of the gaming state. That is, it is easy to win in the open lottery of the electric accessory 39a, or the open time or the number of open times is large (so-called high frequency support mode), or the open lottery has a lower winning probability or is open. There is no mode such as a state where the time and the number of times of opening are small (so-called low frequency support mode). If the configuration has these modes, the range of increase / decrease in the number of balls released can be large, so that it is possible to improve the interest. On the other hand, in order to adjust the amount of balls released in the high frequency support mode, in the low frequency support mode. In some cases, it is unavoidable to take specifications such as setting the frequency of winning prizes to both operating ports 38 and 39 low. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, it is difficult for the operating ports 38 and 39 to win a prize, and there is a possibility that the motivation for the game may be reduced. Therefore, by setting the opening mode of the electric accessory 39a regardless of the gaming state as in the present embodiment, it can be expected that the operating ports 38 and 39 will be awarded to some extent even in the normal gaming state. It is possible to avoid a decrease in motivation for playing games.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 81>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described. The processing of the MPU 112 is roughly divided into a main processing activated when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing and a normal processing executed to advance the game, and an NMI activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is interrupt processing. For convenience of explanation, NMI interrupt processing and timer interrupt processing will be described first, and then main processing and normal processing will be described.

<NMI interrupt processing>
First, the NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring board 115 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 112, and the MPU 112 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process. .. In the NMI interrupt process, the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S100, and this process ends. After that, when it is confirmed that the power failure flag is set in the normal processing described later, the power failure processing is executed. The process will be described later.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically activated by the MPU 112 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. In the following step S102, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In the following step S103, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped (game stopped state). The determination of whether or not the game is stopped is determined on the condition that the game stop flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If it is determined that the game is stopped, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in the stopped state, the reading process of various detection sensors is executed in step S104. In the reading process, the states of various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, 196, 240, 241 are read, the states of these various detection sensors are determined, and the detection information is saved. do. Further, when the winning of the game ball is detected by the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 179 corresponding to the generation of the prize ball, the prize for instructing the payout control device 97 to pay out the prize ball. Set the sphere command. For example, when the entrance sensor 179 detects that the prize is won in the accessory device 150, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is the corresponding number of prize balls, is set.

In the following step S105, a winning process for passing through is executed in association with winning the winning through the through gate 41. In the winning process for through, when a winning is generated in the through gate 41, the number of winning combinations stored in the electric service holding area 114c is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4"). On condition that this is the condition, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S102 is stored in the electric accessory holding area 114c. Further, the effect control device 82 is subjected to a process for lighting the third reserved light emitting unit 56 corresponding to the number of reserved characters stored.

In the following step S106, a winning process for the operating port is executed. In the winning process for the operating port, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in any of the operating ports 38 and 39. Then, when it is determined that the prize has been won, the numerical information such as the jackpot random number counter C1 at that time is acquired, and the numerical information is stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a. The details of the winning process for the operating port will be described later.

Then, after executing the abnormality monitoring process in step S107, the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the abnormality monitoring process, the presence / absence of vibration detection or magnet detection is determined by referring to the detection results of the vibration detection sensor 240 and the magnet detection sensor 241, and the presence / absence of a residual ball abnormality in the accessory device 150 is determined. The details of the abnormality monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the winning process for the operating port in step S106 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 15 and 16.

In step S201, whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first operating port 38 is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first operating port 38. When it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 38, in step S202, a prize ball command for paying out seven game balls is set in the payout control device 97. In the following step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 38. In step S204, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is read, and the start hold storage number RaN held and stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is set. (Hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold storage number RaN). In the following step S205, a process of setting the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened to one is executed. Specifically, a process of setting "1" in the open count counter provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. After that, in step S206, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first operating port 38, in step S207, whether or not the game ball has won the second operating port 39 (starting winning) is determined by the second operating port 39. Judgment is made based on the detection status of the detection sensor corresponding to. When it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 39, a prize ball command for paying out seven game balls is set in the payout control device 97 in step S208. In the following step S209, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 39. In step S210, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is read, and the start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is set. (Hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold storage number RbN). In the following step S211, a process of setting the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened to 2 is executed. Specifically, the process of setting "2" in the above-mentioned open count counter is executed. Even if the number of times of opening is set in the process of step S205 or step S211, there is a possibility that the opening / closing accessory 168 is not opened depending on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 as described above. After that, the information acquisition process is performed in step S206, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, when both step S201 and step S207 are NO, that is, when the game ball does not win in any of the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S208 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output process of step S603 in the normal process (see FIG. 19) described later.

Here, the information acquisition process in step S206 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, whether or not the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S210 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) is determined. judge. If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the hold area for the result display unit corresponding in step S302 is set. In addition to incrementing by 1, the value stored in the total reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) in step S303 is incremented by 1.

In the following step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 updated in step S102 and the open type counter CS updated in the normal processing described later are vacant in the corresponding result display section holding area. It is stored in the first storage area of the storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by 1 in step S302.

That is, when the start hold storage number RaN for the first operating port is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the opening type counter CS are set to the holding area Ra for the first operating port. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area, that is, the hold area Ra corresponding to the start hold storage number RaN for the first operating port incremented by 1 in step S302.

When the start hold storage number RbN for the second operating port is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS are set to the holding area Rb for the second operating port. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area, that is, the hold area Rb corresponding to the start hold storage number RbN for the second operating port incremented by 1 in step S302. After executing the process of step S304, the information acquisition process is terminated.

Next, the abnormality monitoring process in step S107 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 240. When vibration is detected, the vibration detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S402. In the following step S403, the vibration detection command is set as the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. The vibration detection command is a command for causing the effect control device 82 to recognize that the vibration detection has been specified by the MPU 112. The vibration detection command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process described later. In the following step S404, an external output process for abnormality is executed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the amusement park side that the detection of vibration is specified.

If vibration is not detected in step S401, or after the external output process for abnormality in step S404 is executed, it is determined in step S405 whether or not the magnet is detected by the magnet detection sensor 241. When the magnet is detected, the magnet detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S406, and the magnet detection command is set as the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the subsequent step S407. do. The magnet detection command is a command for causing the effect control device 82 to recognize that the magnet detection is specified by the MPU 112. The magnet detection command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process described later. In the following step S408, an external output process for abnormality is executed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the amusement park side that the detection of the magnet is specified.

Whether or not the remaining sphere flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S409 when the magnet is not detected in step S405 or after the external output process for abnormality in step S408 is executed. Is determined. The remaining ball flag indicates that the game ball remains in the bonus device 150, and its existence is confirmed even though the game ball should not exist in the bonus device 150. It is stored when it is done. If the remaining sphere flag is not stored, the error monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the remaining sphere flag is stored, the remaining ball detection command is set as the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S410. The residual detection command is a command for causing the effect control device 82 to recognize that the detection of the residual sphere is specified by the MPU 112. The residual detection command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process described later. In the following step S411, an external output process for abnormality is executed and the abnormality monitoring process is terminated in order to output a signal to the management control device on the playground side that the detection of the remaining sphere is specified.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, a wait process is executed for, for example, about 1 second in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (payout control device 97, etc.) to be in an operable state. In the following step S502, access to the RAM 114 is permitted.

After that, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 98a provided in the power supply and emission control device 98 is turned on, and in the following step S504, whether the power failure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Judge whether or not. When the power failure flag is stored, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S505, and in the following step S506, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, that is, the memory is retained. Determine the validity of the data. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 114. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data depending on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 114 is correctly stored.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 98a. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed (the result of step S503 is YES), the process proceeds from step S507 to step S509. Further, when the power failure flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 and the power cutoff occurrence information is not set (the result of step S504 is NO), or depending on the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). When an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed (the result of step S506 is NO), the process proceeds from step S507 to step S509.

In step S507, an initialization command is output in order to initialize the control device (payout control device 97, etc.) on the sub side. In the following step S508, the used area of the RAM 114 is cleared to 0, and in the step S509, the initialization process of the RAM 114 is executed. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S516, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 98a is not pressed, various types of RAM 114 are set in step S510, provided that the power failure flag is stored and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Clear the power failure flag stored in the flag storage area 114e. In the following step S511, a power recovery command for returning the control device on the sub side (payout control device 97, etc.) to the gaming state before the power is cut off is output.

In the following step S512, it is determined whether or not the abnormality detection flag (vibration detection flag, magnet detection flag, remaining ball flag) is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If the abnormality detection flag is stored, the abnormality detection flag is cleared in step S513 to release the abnormality detection state.

Whether or not the game stop state is set based on the game stop flag of the RAM 114 in step S514 after the abnormality detection flag is not stored in step S512 or after the abnormality detection state is canceled in step S513. Is determined.

When the game stop state is set, in step S515, the game stop flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to release the game stop state. Specifically, the launch stop process for prohibiting the launch of the game ball, the payout stop process for stopping the payout of the game ball by the payout device 96, and the like are released. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S516, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later. As a result, the state before the power is cut off is restored. At this time, if vibration, magnets, residual spheres are detected, and the game stop state is set before the power is cut off, the state is restored in the released state.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S601 to S610 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S612 and S613 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal process, first, the game stop determination process is executed in step S601. In the game stop determination process, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation should stop the progress of the game, the game stop process is executed. Details of the game stop process will be described later.

In the following step S602, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped, and the processes of steps S603 to S609 are executed on condition that the game is not stopped. In step S603, the external signal output process is executed. In the external signal output processing, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. Further, if an effect command, a vibration detection command, a magnet detection command, and a residual detection command are set, they are transmitted to the effect control device 82.

Next, in step S604, the open type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the open type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the open type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In the following step S605, a game control process for advancing the game is executed. In the game control process, drive control (first open / close execution mode) of each drive unit of the accessory device 150 based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 is performed. After executing the game control process in step S605, the process proceeds to step S606 to execute the game state transition process. By this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the second open / close execution mode. Details of the game control process in step S605 and the game state transition process in step S606 will be described later.

In the following step S607, a remaining ball determination process for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is executed. In the remaining ball determination process, it is determined whether or not the game ball that has won a prize in the accessory device 150 due to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is not properly discharged and remains in the accessory device 150. .. The details of the remaining ball determination process will be described later.

After the execution of step S607, in step S608, the electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operating port 39 is executed. In the electric service support process, a lottery for opening the electric service is used to determine whether or not to open the electric service 39a using the numerical information acquired from the electric service release counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 114c of the RAM 114. At the same time, if the electric accessory is won in the open state, the electric accessory 39a is opened and closed. In addition, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric service opening lottery.

After that, in step S609, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 98. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

Whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S610 when it is determined in step S602 that the game is stopped, or after the game ball launch control process of step S609 is executed. Is determined.

If the power failure flag is not stored, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S611, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Is determined. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the open type counter CS are repeatedly updated (steps S612 and S613). That is, in step S612, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S613, the open type counter CS is updated.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S601 to S609 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The open type counter CS can also be updated at random.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S610 that the power failure flag is stored, the power supply is cut off due to the power failure, so the power failure processing after step S614 is executed. That is, in step S614, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and then a power failure command indicating that the power is cut off in step S615 is output to the control device (payout control device 97, etc.) on the sub side.

Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and saved in step S616, access to the RAM 114 is prohibited in step S617, and then an infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Even after the power is completely cut off, the power and the emission control device 98 supply the data storage holding power (power at the time of power failure) of the RAM 114, so that the information stored in the RAM 114 before the power is cut off is It is held as it is for a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days).

<Game stop judgment processing>
Next, the game stop determination process of step S601 in the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game stop determination process, in each step of steps S701 to S703, it is determined whether or not the vibration detection flag, the magnet detection flag, or the remaining ball flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. As a result, it is determined whether or not the vibration has been detected, whether or not the magnet has been detected, and whether or not the presence of the remaining sphere has been specified. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S701 to S703, the game stop determination process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S701 to S703, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, a closing control process for displacing the electric accessory 39a and the accessory device 150 (opening / closing accessory 168) into the closed state is executed. As a result, when the electric accessory 39a or the accessory device 150 is open, it is forcibly closed.

In the following step S705, a firing stop process is executed in which the firing permission signal to the power supply and the firing control device 98 is switched to the LOW level to prohibit the firing of the game ball, and further, in step S706, other release processing is executed. For example, a game stop command is output to the payout control device 97 to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout device 96. Further, a game stop command is output to the effect control device 82 to stop the effect display and the like on the symbol display device 51. After the execution of step S706, in step S707, the game stop flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, and the game stop state is set. After that, the game stop determination process is terminated.

By setting the game stop state in the game stop determination process as described above, affirmative determination is made in both step S103 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) and step S602 of the normal process (FIG. 19) executed thereafter. Will be done. If an affirmative determination is made in those steps, the processes of steps S104 to S107 and the processes of steps S604 to S609 are skipped. These processes are processes for substantially advancing the game, and by skipping such processes, the progress of the game can be stopped.

Incidentally, even when the game is stopped, the process of updating the counters C1, C2, CS, CINI, and C4 for various lottery is continued without being skipped (steps S101 and S102 in FIG. 14 and step S612 in FIG. 19). , S613). As a result, the counters C1, C2, CS, CINI, and C4 for various lottery can be continuously updated even when the game is stopped. In this configuration, even if the RAM erasing switch 98a is operated and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the initialization of the counters C1, C2, CS, CINI, and C4 for various lottery is not executed, and the game is stopped. It is more effective when applied to a configuration in which initialization of the RAM 114 is not essential when the state is released.
<Game control processing>
Next, the game control process in step S605 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 to 27.

In the game control process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the second open / close execution mode (open / close execution mode based on the direct hit result or the occurrence of the V prize) is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second open / close execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The second open / close execution mode flag indicates that the second open / close execution mode is being executed, and is stored when the game state is shifted to the second open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later. It is deleted when the second open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

When in the second open / close execution mode, the processes after step S802, that is, the game start process of steps S803 to S806, the game progress process of steps S808 to S810, and the game end process of steps S811 to S813. This game control process is terminated without executing any of the above. That is, when the second opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the game starts regardless of whether or not the operating ports 38 and 39 have been awarded (the combination triggered by the winning of the operating openings 38 and 38). The object device 150 is not opened).

If it is not in the second open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S802 whether or not the first open / close execution mode (open / close execution mode based on the normal opening result) is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first open / close execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The first open / close execution mode flag indicates that the first open / close execution mode is being executed, and the game result based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 is the opening result (in the present embodiment, the normal opening result). ), And is deleted at the end of the operation (including the waiting period after closing) of the accessory device 150 based on the result.

If the player is not in the first open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to the game start process of steps S803 to S806. In the game start process, first, in step S803, it is determined whether or not the common hold number CRN is “0”. When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first actuating port 38 and the second actuating port 39. Therefore, the game control process is terminated as it is. If the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is set for the lottery process in step S804. The data setting process of the above is executed, and further, in step S805, the pass / fail determination process of determining the game result of the data set in the data setting process is executed. After that, in step S806, the control start process for starting the control of the accessory device 150 is executed, and then the game control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process of step S804, the pass / fail determination process of step S805, and the control start process of step S806 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the data setting process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is “0”. When the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first result display unit of steps S902 to S907 is executed, and when the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0". Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit of steps S908 to S913.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common hold number CRN is 1 or more, as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit BS. If it is stored, the data stored in the second result display unit hold area Rb is set for the lottery process regardless of whether or not the first start hold storage number RaN is 1 or more. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the hold area Ra for the first result display unit and the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, the hold information for the second result display unit corresponding to the second operation port 39 is stored. The hold information stored in the hold area Rb has priority.

In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S902, the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is decremented by 1. In the following step S903, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. After that, in step S904, the data stored in the first area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S905, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first. The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3 area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area, and so on.

In the following step S906, the second result display unit flag (second result display unit information) is set in the second result display unit flag storage area (second result display unit information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If it is memorized, it is erased, and if it is not memorized, its state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is for specifying whether the target of this hit / fail determination corresponds to the reserved information of the first result display unit reserved area Ra or the second result display unit reserved area Rb. Information.

In the following step S907, a shift command (shift generation information), which is information for causing the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted is set. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, to the first operation port 38. A shift command including information that the data is supported is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S907 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes a process for changing the display in the first hold light emitting unit 54 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command.

In the data setting process for the second result display unit, first, in step S908, the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is decremented by 1. In the following step S909, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. After that, in step S910, the data stored in the first area of the holding area Rb for the second result display unit is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S911, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display unit holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first. The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3 area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area, and so on.

In the following step S912, the second result display unit flag (second result display unit information) is set in the second result display unit flag storage area (second result display unit information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If it is not stored, the second result display unit flag is stored, and if it is stored, that state is maintained.

In the following step S913, a shift command (shift generation information), which is information for causing the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted is set. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, corresponds to the second operation port 39. A shift command containing information about what is being done is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S913 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes a process for changing the display in the second hold light emitting unit 55 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command.

Next, the pass / fail determination process in step S805 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time is a direct hit result by referring to the data (big hit random number counter C1) shifted to the execution area AE this time and the result table of ROM 113. If it is a direct hit result, the process proceeds to step S1102, and a process of storing the V winning flag in the various flag storage areas 114e is executed. The V winning flag originally indicates that the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192, but here, it functions as a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp the occurrence of the second open execution mode. do.

In the following step S1103, the direct hit command is set as the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Further, in step S1103, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to the display corresponding to the direct hit is executed. After that, the true / false determination process is terminated.

The direct hit command set in step S1103 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes the process for the start effect of the open / close execution mode based on the received direct hit command.

If the result is not a direct hit in step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time is an outlier result by referring to the data (big hit random number counter C1) shifted to the execution area AE this time and the result table of ROM 113. If the result is off, the process proceeds to step S1105, and the value set by the open count counter in step S205 or step S211 in the winning process for the operating port (FIG. 15) is cleared to "0".

Then, in step S1106, the disconnection command is set as the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Further, in step S1106, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to the display corresponding to the result is executed. After that, the true / false determination process is terminated.

The deviation command set in step S1106 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the accessory device 150 is not in the open state based on the received disengagement command.

If it is not a deviation result in step S1104, it means that the result of the hit / fail determination this time is a normal opening result. In this case, in step S1107, the normal release command is set as the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Further, in step S1107, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to the display corresponding to the normal opening result is executed. After that, the true / false determination process is terminated.

The normal release command set in step S1107 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the accessory device 150 is in the open state based on the received normal release command. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the winning / failing determination (game result) is immediately notified based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39.

Next, the control start process in step S806 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

In the control start process, first, in step S1201, a process of grasping the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened is executed with reference to the opening number counter in the RAM 114. In the following step S1202, the opening / closing timing setting process is executed. In the open / close timing setting process, among the data shifted to the execution area AE in the above data setting process (FIG. 22), the data related to the open timing, that is, the value of the open type counter CS and the open timing table stored in the ROM 113. And, the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 this time is set with reference to. Specifically, from this process, the numerical value corresponding to how many seconds after the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened (whether the drive control of the opening / closing accessory drive unit 173 is started) is read from the opening timing table, and the RAM 114 Input to the standby counter provided in various counter areas 114d. This standby counter is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle and reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), so that it is possible to grasp that the opening / closing accessory 168 is open.

In the following step S1203, the first distribution setting process for setting the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 (see FIG. 8) is executed. In the first distribution setting process of step S1203, the first distribution member 300 maintains a non-distribution state (a state in which the game ball is not distributed to the exit 182b side) during the execution of the first opening / closing execution mode. The above operation mode is set. That is, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have won the prize in the accessory device 150 and are guided to the guidance passage 183 on the left side by the ball distribution unit 185 at the time of executing the first opening / closing execution mode all reach the rotating body 201. Will be. The game ball is not limited to this, and for example, the game ball that has won the prize in the accessory device 150 by setting the first distribution member 300 in the distribution state during a part of the execution period of the first opening / closing execution mode is the rotating body 201. It may be configured to provide an opportunity to be guided to the outlet 182b without reaching.

Next, in step S1204, a second distribution setting process for setting the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 (see FIG. 8) is executed, and further, in step S1205, the shutter 221 (see FIG. 8) is executed. ), The shutter setting process for setting the operation mode is executed. In the second distribution setting process of step S1204, the second distribution member 310 maintains a non-distribution state (a state in which the game ball is not distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side) during execution of the first open / close execution mode. The operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set in 1. Further, in the shutter setting process of step S1205, the operation mode of the shutter 221 is set so that the shutter 221 is maintained in the closed state (the state in which the warp inlet portion 214 is closed) during the execution of the first opening / closing execution mode.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the first opening / closing execution mode, the route passing through the warp passage 210 is blocked, and the rotating body 201 exclusively receives a distribution lottery as to whether or not to win a V prize. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the route via the warp passage 210 is released during a part of the execution period of the first opening / closing execution mode (the second distribution member 310 is placed in the distribution state and the shutter 221 is in the distribution state). The game ball winning in the accessory device 150 may be guided to the V winning opening 182a without passing through the rotating body 201.

After the execution of step S1205, in step S1206, a rotating body setting process for setting the operation mode of the rotating body 201 is executed. In the setting process for the rotating body in step S1206, the setting for returning the rotating body 201 to the initial position (the position where the V winning opening guide unit 204 faces the lead-out unit 186) and the rotating body 201 after returning to the initial position are set. The rotation start timing for starting rotation, the rotation speed of the rotating body 201 for starting rotation, and the like are set. In the present embodiment, the rotating body 201 starts rotating from the initial position at the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 1 sec) has elapsed from the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 that triggered the execution of the first opening / closing execution mode. Then, the operation mode of the rotating body 201 is set so that the rotation of one rotation in about 5 sec is continuously repeated until at least the end of the first opening / closing execution mode. After the execution of step S1206, the control start process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game control process of FIG. 21, when it is determined in step S802 that the first open / close execution mode is in progress, it is determined in step S807 whether or not the end waiting time has elapsed. The end-time waiting time is a period for waiting for the end of the first opening / closing execution mode after the opening / closing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is completed. The process of setting the waiting time at the end will be described later.

If the waiting time at the end has not elapsed, the game progress processing of steps S808 to S810 is executed. In the game progress process, the control process is executed in step S808, the in-feature motion unit process is executed in step S809, the winning process is executed in the following step S810, and then the game control process is terminated. do.

First, the process under control in step S808 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168. In this determination, it can be confirmed whether or not the opening timing is reached by referring to the value of the standby counter set in step S1202. If the opening timing is in step S1301, the opening control process is executed in step S1302. In this process, the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing accessory 168 in the open state. Further, in step S1302, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current opening period (uniformly 0.5 sec in the present embodiment) is executed in the opening period counter provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The opening period counter is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle and reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), so that it is possible to grasp that the opening / closing accessory 168 is closed.

Then, in the subsequent step S1303, a process of subtracting "1" from the open count counter of the RAM 114 is executed. In the following step S1304, the opening count counter of the RAM 114 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is the first opening in the first opening / closing execution mode. In the case of the first opening, in step S1305, the first open / close execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, and then the process during this control is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1305 that it is not the first opening, that is, if it is the second opening in the second opening, the process during this control is terminated as it is.

If it is not the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1306. In step S1306, it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168. In this process, it is possible to confirm whether or not the closing timing is reached by referring to the value of the opening period counter input in step S1302. If the closing timing is in step S1306, the closing control process is executed in step S1307. In this process, by terminating the drive control of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state.

In the following step S1308, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times of opening is "0" by referring to the number of times of opening of RAM 114. If it is "0", the process for setting the waiting time at the end is executed in step S1309.

As described above, the end-time waiting time is a period for waiting for the end of the first opening / closing execution mode after the opening / closing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is completed. The waiting time is set in consideration of the period until the game ball winning the bonus device 150 is discharged from the bonus device 150. In the present embodiment, the period until the game ball winning the bonus device 150 reaches the V winning sensor 192 via the guide passage 183 on the left side and the rotating body 201 is set to about 3 sec, and the player waits at the end. The time is set to a predetermined period longer than this (uniformly 3.5 sec in the present embodiment). With such a configuration, even if the game ball wins a prize just before the accessory device 150 is closed, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a big hit based on the V prize.

In step S1309, a process of inputting a value corresponding to 3.5 sec to the end standby time counter provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. Since the end wait time counter is updated (1 decrement) every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, the end wait time counter becomes a predetermined value (for example, "0") at the end. It becomes possible to grasp that the waiting time has elapsed.

If the number of times of opening is not "0" in step S1308, that is, if the second opening in the second opening remains, the waiting time (closed) until the second opening is executed in step S1310. Time) setting process is executed. In the process of step S1310, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current standby time (uniformly 1 sec in the present embodiment) to the standby time counter of the RAM 114 is executed.

If it is not the closing timing in step S1306, the process during this control is terminated after the process of step S1309 is executed or the process of step S1310 is executed.

Next, the process for the in-feature motion unit in step S809 in the game control process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.

In step S1401, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300. If it is the displacement timing, the first distribution control process is executed in step S1402. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated, and the first distribution member 300 is changed from the distribution state to the non-displacement state. Displace. When the first distribution drive unit 300a is not in the drive state, the drive is started to displace the first distribution member 300 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state.

If it is not the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300 in step S1401, or after the process of step S1402 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing of the second distribution member 310. If it is the displacement timing, the second distribution control process is executed in step S1404. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated, and the second distribution member 310 is changed from the distribution state to the non-displacement state. Displace. When the second distribution drive unit 310a is not in the drive state, the drive is started to displace the second distribution member 310 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, both the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are set to be maintained in the non-distribution state in the first opening / closing execution mode (FIG. 24). Steps S1203 and S1204), in the determination of steps S1401 and S1403 in the first opening / closing execution mode, a negative determination is always made, and the processing of steps S1402 and S1404 is not executed.

If it is not the displacement timing of the second distribution member 310 in step S1403, or after the process of step S1404 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing of the shutter 221. If it is the displacement timing, the shutter control process is executed in step S1406. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the shutter drive unit 221a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the shutter drive unit 221a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated and the shutter 221 is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Further, when the shutter drive unit 221a is not in the drive state, the drive is started to displace the shutter 221 from the closed state to the open state.

Since the shutter 221 is also set to be maintained in the closed state in the first opening / closing execution mode (step S1205 in FIG. 24), a negative determination is always made in the determination in step S1405 in the first opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the process of step S1406 is not executed.

After the execution of step S1406, the rotating body control process is executed in step S1407. In the process of step S1407, the driving state of the rotating body driving unit 194 is controlled in order to drive and control the rotating body 201 according to the setting content (step S1206 of FIG. 24) already described. After the execution of step S1407, the processing for the operation unit in the main character is terminated.

Next, the winning process of step S810 in the game control process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

In step S1501, the detection state of the entrance sensor 179 is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the accessory device 150. If a prize has been won, the prize-winning command in the accessory is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S1502. The in-feature winning command set in step S1502 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 notifies that a prize has been generated in the bonus device 150 (notification for paying attention to the operation of the game ball in the bonus device 150) based on the received prize command in the bonus device. To execute the processing for.

In a subsequent step S1503, a process of incrementing the remaining sphere counter RPC provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 by 1 is executed. The remaining ball counter RPC is for grasping the number of game balls existing in the accessory device 150 by the MPU 112.

When it is determined in step S1501 that no prize has been generated for the accessory device 150, or after the processing of step S1503 is executed, in step S1504, the game ball is passed by the V prize sensor 192 (generation of V prize). ) Is detected. When the occurrence of the V winning is detected, the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1505. In a subsequent step S1506, a process of decrementing the remaining ball counter RPC provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. That is, when the occurrence of the V prize is detected in step S1504, it means that the game ball is discharged from the accessory device 150 in addition to the occurrence of the V prize. The number of game balls in the object device 150 is updated. After the execution of step S1506, the main winning process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the occurrence of the V winning is not detected in step S1504, it is determined in step S1507 whether or not the passage (disengagement) of the game ball is detected by the disengagement sensor 193. If the deviation is detected, the process proceeds to step S1506 and the process of decrementing the remaining ball counter RPC by 1 is executed. That is, even when the detachment is detected, the detachment with respect to the game ball is confirmed, and it means that the game ball is discharged from the accessory device 150. Therefore, the accessory device is reduced by reducing the remaining ball counter RPC. Update the number of game balls in 150. On the other hand, if the deviation is not detected in step S1507, that is, if neither the V winning nor the deviation can be specified, the main winning process is terminated without updating the remaining ball counter RPC.

Returning to the description of the game control process of FIG. 21, if it is determined in step S807 that the end time waiting time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S811 and the game end processes of steps S811 to S813 are executed. In the situation where the waiting time at the end is not set, a negative determination is made in step S807, and the game progress processing of steps S808 to S810 described above is executed.

In the game end process, first, in step S811, a process of clearing the first open / close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is executed. In the following step S812, the control end process is executed. In this process, a process for terminating the control (first open / close execution mode) of the accessory device 150 for one hold information is performed. Specifically, the presence or absence of errors in each drive unit 173, 300a, 310a, 194 is confirmed, and the process of returning to the initial position is performed.

Next, in step S813, the control end command is set as the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82, and then the game control process is terminated. The control end command set in step S813 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the control of the accessory device 150 is completed based on the received control end command.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process of step S606 in the normal process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 35 and the like.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the second open / close execution mode (open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result) is being executed. If it is not in the second open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1602, and it is determined whether or not the first open / close execution mode (open / close execution mode based on the normal opening result) is being executed. If the first open / close execution mode is being executed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the first open / close execution mode is not being executed, in step S1603, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time corresponds to the transition to the second open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If the V winning flag is not stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

When the V winning flag is stored, the start process of the second open / close execution mode is executed in step S1604. In the start process, the V winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is erased, and the second open / close execution mode flag is stored in the same area 114e. Further, in step S1604, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without starting the opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 for the opening of the opening / closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed.

In the following step S1605, a type determination process for determining the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, among the pending information stored in the execution area AE this time, the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped, and the type table of the ROM 113 is referred to, and the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 16R continuation mode. It is determined whether the mode is the continuation rate fluctuation mode.

In the following step S1606, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode based on the processing result of step S1605. In the 16R continuation mode, the continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1607. The continuation flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp that the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 16R continuation mode.

If the 16R continuation mode is not set in step S1606, or after the process of step S1607 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1608. In step S1608, "15" is set in the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, and "19" is set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 114d. .. The first round counter RC1 is a counter for counting the number of round games in one second open / close execution mode, and the second round counter RC2 is the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened in one round game. It is a counter for counting.

In this embodiment, the first open / close execution mode when a direct hit or a V prize occurs corresponds to the first round game out of the 16 round games, and from the second and subsequent round games. The second open / close execution mode is started. That is, the second round is the first round in the second open / close execution mode.

After the execution of step S1608, the setting process for the rotating body is executed in step S1609. In the setting process for the rotating body, the setting for returning the rotating body 201 to the initial position (the position where the V winning opening guide unit 204 faces the lead-out unit 186) and the rotating body 201 start rotating after returning to the initial position. The rotation start timing to be performed, the rotation speed of the rotating body 201 that has started rotation, and the like are set. In the present embodiment, the rotation from the initial position is started at the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 1 sec) has elapsed from the start timing of the opening, and then the rotation of one rotation in about 5 sec is performed at least in the second opening / closing execution mode. The operation mode of the rotating body 201 is set so as to be continuously repeated until the end of.

In the following step S1610, an opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This opening command contains information on whether it is a 16R continuation mode or a continuation rate fluctuation mode. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 51 so that the display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

In the following step S1611, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the playground side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. You can understand what you have done.

On the other hand, when the second opening / closing execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S1601 and the process proceeds to step S1612. In step S1612, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, the opening / closing process is executed in step S1613.

Here, the opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", the main opening / closing process is terminated, while if it is not "0", it is determined in step S1702 whether or not the round game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the round flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The round flag is a flag indicating that the round game is being executed, is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e at the start of the round game, and is erased at the end of the round game.

If it is determined in step S1702 that the round flag is not stored and the round game is not in progress, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the value of the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is "0". judge. The process of this step corresponds to the process of determining whether or not the closing time (waiting time) between the round games, which will be described later, has elapsed.

If the value of the timer counter T is not "0", the main opening / closing process is terminated, while if it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1704 and the setting process for each round is executed.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, for the setting process for each round, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is stored in the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 16R continuation mode. When the continuation flag is not stored and the opening / closing execution mode this time is the continuation rate fluctuation mode, the process of grasping the number of rounds is executed in step S1802. In this process, the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode of the round set in the setting process of this round is grasped with reference to the value of the first round counter RC1. Then, in step S1803, the round pattern table stored in the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 31, the round pattern table defines an opening / closing pattern for each round in the second opening / closing execution mode. A plurality of types of opening / closing patterns of the opening / closing accessory 168 of each round are set, and an opening / closing pattern A, an opening / closing pattern B, an opening / closing pattern C, and an opening / closing pattern D are set.

The specific opening / closing mode for each of the opening / closing patterns A to D is defined by the opening / closing pattern table stored in the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113. As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (d), the opening / closing pattern table stores the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing accessory 168 in association with the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened in each round game. The opening / closing pattern table consists of the first game section of the early stage (opening from the first to the sixth), the second game section of the middle stage (opening from the seventh to the thirteenth), and the final stage (14th to 19th opening) of the round game. After dividing into three game sections (game periods) with the third game section (opening up to the third time), the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing accessory 168 is defined for each game section.

For example, in the opening / closing pattern A, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), during the 19 opening times in one round game, the first to sixth times (RC2 = 19 to 14) belonging to the first game section and the second In the 7th to 13th times (RC2 = 13 to 7) belonging to the game section, the opening time is 1.5 sec, which is longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball, and then 0.5 sec is closed. (Also referred to as opening / closing pattern P1). Further, in the 14th to 19th times (RC2 = 6 to 1) belonging to the third game section, 0.5 sec is opened and then 1.5 sec is closed (also referred to as opening / closing pattern P2). In the case of P1, winning a prize in the accessory device 150 is relatively easy to occur in relation to the firing cycle, and in the case of P2, although it can occur, it is less likely to occur than A1. That is, the opening / closing pattern A makes it easy for a game ball to win a prize in the accessory device 150 in the first game section and the second game section.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), regarding the opening / closing pattern B, the opening / closing pattern P1 is set in the second game section, and the opening / closing pattern P2 is set in the first game section and the third game section. That is, the opening / closing pattern B makes it easy for a game ball to win a prize in the accessory device 150 in the second game section.

As shown in FIG. 32 (c), regarding the opening / closing pattern C, the opening / closing pattern P1 is set in the first game section, and the opening / closing pattern P2 is set in the second game section and the third game section. That is, the opening / closing pattern C makes it easy for a game ball to win a prize in the accessory device 150 in the first game section.

As shown in FIG. 32 (d), regarding the opening / closing pattern D, the opening / closing pattern P1 is set in the third game section, and the opening / closing pattern P2 is set in the first game section and the second game section. That is, the opening / closing pattern D makes it easy for a game ball to win a prize in the accessory device 150 in the third game section.

Based on these, the winning characteristics of each round game will be explained. As shown in FIG. 32 (e), the second round game in which the opening / closing pattern A is set includes the first game section and the second game section ( In the 1st to 13th opening), the round game has the winning characteristic A in which the game ball is easily won in the accessory device 150, and the 3rd to 7th round games in which the opening / closing pattern B is set are the round games. In the second game section (7th to 13th opening), the round game has a winning characteristic B in which the game ball is easily won in the accessory device 150. Further, in the 8th to 11th round games in which the opening / closing pattern D is set, the winning characteristic that the game ball is easily won in the accessory device 150 in the 3rd game section (14th to 19th opening). In the 12th to 16th round games in which the opening / closing pattern C is set, the game ball is placed on the accessory device 150 in the first game section (1st to 6th opening). It is a round game having a winning characteristic C that is easy to win.

Returning to the description of each round setting process (FIG. 30), after referring to the round pattern table in step S1803, the process of setting the corresponding round pattern (round opening / closing pattern) is executed in step S1804. Specifically, various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are provided with flag storage areas corresponding to the patterns A to D. For example, in the case of the open / close pattern A, the flags are stored in the corresponding areas.

If the continuation flag is stored in step S1801, or after the process of step S1804 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, "9" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The winning counter PC indicates the number of winnings in one round game, and in the present embodiment, the round game ends when nine game balls win the accessory device 150 in one round game. .. In the following step S1806, the process of setting "19" in the second round counter RC2 is executed, and then in step S1807, the round flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. After the execution of step S1807, this setting process ends.

Returning to the description of the opening / closing process (FIG. 29), after executing the process of step S1704, the setting process for each opening is executed in step S1705.

In each opening setting process, specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33, it is first determined in step S1901 whether or not the continuation flag is stored. This process is the same as the process of step S1801. If the continuation flag is not stored and the continuation rate fluctuation mode is set, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, the second round counter RC2 is grasped, and the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened in one round is grasped. Then, in step S1903, the open / closed pattern table (FIGS. 32 (a) to (d)) stored in the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to, and in step S1904, the open number grasped in step S1902. The opening / closing patterns P1 and P2 corresponding to are set.

In the following step S1905, the distribution pattern table stored in the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to. Here, the distribution pattern table will be described with reference to FIG. 34.

The distribution pattern tables include a first distribution pattern table for the first distribution member 300 (FIG. 34 (a)) and a second distribution pattern table for the second distribution member 310 (FIG. 34 (b)). ) And are provided. First, the first distribution pattern table will be described.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is stored in the first distribution pattern table in association with the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened in each round game. As in the case of the opening / closing pattern table (FIG. 32), the first distribution pattern table is the first game section in the early stage (opening from the first to the sixth time) and the middle stage (the seventh to the thirteenth time) of the round game. After dividing into three game sections, the second game section of (open) and the third game section of the final stage (open from the 14th to the 19th time), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 for each game section. Is specified.

In each opening of the first game section (1st to 6th times) and the 3rd game section (14th to 19th times), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set in the operation pattern MA. The operation pattern MA is displaced to the distribution state after the period TM1 (0.5 sec) from the opening start of the opening / closing accessory 168, and is displaced to the non-distribution state after the period TM2 (0.1 sec) from the displacement, and then. The non-displacement state is maintained until the opening / closing accessory 168 is closed.

Further, in each opening of the second game section (7th to 13th times), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set in the operation pattern MB. The operation pattern MB is displaced to the distribution state after the period TM3 (0.5 sec) from the opening start of the opening / closing accessory 168, and is displaced to the non-distribution state after the period TM4 (0.5 sec) from the displacement, and then. The non-displacement state is maintained until the opening / closing accessory 168 is closed.

That is, in the second game section, the period in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state is longer than that in the first game section and the third game section. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the guide passage 183 on the left side is easily distributed to the outlier 182b by the first distribution member 300 in the second game section, and is difficult to reach the rotating body 201.

Next, the second distribution pattern table will be described. As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is stored in the second distribution pattern table in association with the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened in each round game. In the second distribution pattern table, as in the case of the first distribution pattern table, the first game section (opening from the first to the sixth) and the middle (opening from the seventh to the thirteenth) of the round game are opened. ), And the third game section at the end of the game (opening from the 14th to the 19th time), and then the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set for each game section. It is specified.

In each opening of the first game section (1st to 6th times), the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set in the operation pattern SA. The operation pattern SA is displaced to the distribution state after the period TS1 (0.5 sec) from the opening start of the opening / closing accessory 168, and is displaced to the non-distribution state after the period TS2 (0.1 sec) from the displacement, and then. The non-displacement state is maintained until the opening / closing accessory 168 is closed.

Further, in each opening of the second game section (7th to 13th times) and the third game section (14th to 19th times), the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set in the operation pattern SB. The operation pattern SB is displaced to the distribution state after the period TS3 (0.5 sec) from the opening start of the opening / closing accessory 168, and is displaced to the non-distribution state after the period TS4 (0.3 sec) from the displacement. The non-displacement state is maintained until the opening / closing accessory 168 is closed.

That is, in the second game section and the third game section, the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is longer than that in the first game section. For this reason, the winning ball is distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side in the second game section and the third game section, rather than the game ball winning in the accessory device 150 in the first game section. It will be easy.

Here, in the present embodiment, the operation of the shutter 221 is such that the shutter 221 is in the closed state (the state in which the warp inlet portion 214 is closed) during the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state. Aspects are set. Therefore, the game ball distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by the second distribution member 310 cannot pass through the warp passage 210 and is stored in the accessory device 150 as it is. Therefore, when the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set as described above, the game ball that has won the prize in the accessory device 150 has the seventh to thirteenth openth (second game) related to the prize. In the case of the section) and the 14th to 19th times (third game section), it is easy to be stored in the accessory device 150.

Next, the distribution characteristics of the combination of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 will be described. As shown in FIG. 34 (c), in the first game section (first to sixth opening), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set in the operation pattern SA, and the second distribution member 310 The operation mode is set to the operation pattern MA. Therefore, the game ball that has won the prize in the bonus device 150 in the first game section is difficult to be stored in the bonus device 150 and easily reaches the rotating body 201.

In the second game section (7th to 13th opening), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set in the operation pattern SB, and the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set in the operation pattern MB. .. Therefore, the game ball that has won the prize in the bonus device 150 in the second game section is likely to be stored in the bonus device 150 and is difficult to reach the rotating body 201.

In the third game section (14th to 19th opening), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set in the operation pattern SA, and the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set in the operation pattern MA. .. Therefore, the game ball that has won the prize in the bonus device 150 in the third game section is likely to be stored in the bonus device 150, and if it is not stored, it is easy to reach the rotating body 201.

The operation mode of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 is different from the case of the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168, and is common to all rounds (second to 16th rounds). There is. That is, the operation mode of each distribution member 300, 310 is uniquely defined in each round.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for each opening (FIG. 33), after referring to the distribution pattern table in step S1905, in step S1906, each shaking is performed with the operation pattern corresponding to the opening number grasped in step S1902. The branch members 300 and 310 are set. Specifically, for the first distribution member 300, a value corresponding to the period TM1 (0.5 sec) is set in the first distribution counter provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. Further, for the second distribution member 310, a value corresponding to the period TS1 (0.5 sec) is set in the second distribution counter provided in the same area 114d. Since the first distribution counter and the second distribution counter are updated (1 displacement) each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, each of these counters has a predetermined value (for example, "0"). ), It becomes possible to grasp the displacement timing of each of the distribution members 300 and 310.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the determination process of step S1901 that the continuation flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1907, and the opening / closing pattern of this round is set to P1. That is, in the case of the 16R continuation mode, the opening / closing pattern of the pattern having the longest opening time is set in all the opening times (RC2) in all rounds (RC1). Therefore, in the 16R continuation mode, the maximum number of winnings is likely to occur in each round. In the present embodiment, in the open / close execution mode of the 16R continuation mode, the player continues to the next round even if the V prize is not won (even if the continuation condition is not satisfied).

In the following step S1908, the operation mode (distribution pattern) of each distribution member 300, 310 is set. The distribution pattern in the 16R continuation mode is the same as in the case of the first opening / closing execution mode, and each distribution is performed throughout the entire period from the start to the end of each opening (in other words, the entire period from the start to the end of the round game). The operation modes of the dividing members 300 and 310 are set so as to be maintained in the non-distribution state.

After executing the process of step S1906 or after executing the process of step S1908, the present setting process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the opening / closing process (FIG. 29), after executing the setting process for each opening in step S1705, the opening process is executed in step S1706. Specifically, the drive control of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is started to open the opening / closing accessory 168. Then, the release command is set in step S1707, and the main opening / closing process is completed. This set release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). In this release command, in addition to information on whether or not the 16R continuation mode is set, the number of rounds of opening (information on the first round counter RC1) and the number of times of opening in one round (second). Information on the round counter RC2) and information on the opening / closing patterns A to D are included. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect for notifying the opening / closing pattern, the winning rate to the accessory device 150, etc., based on the received release command, and various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. To control.

If the round flag is stored in step S1702 and it is determined that the round game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1708 to determine whether or not the opening / closing accessory 168 is being opened. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving state of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173. When the opening / closing accessory 168 is being opened / closed, the opening / closing process is executed in step S1709, and then the main opening / closing process is terminated.

Here, the processing for opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the opening process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0". In the process of this step, the opening time per opening / closing accessory 168, that is, the elapsed time from the start of opening the opening / closing accessory 168, is set by referring to the opening / closing pattern table (FIG. 32). It is a process of determining whether or not the (upper limit opening time) has been reached.

If the value of the timer counter T is not "0" and the opening time of the opening / closing accessory 168 has not reached the upper limit opening time, the process proceeds to step S2102, and whether or not the game ball has won the accessory device 150 is determined. Judgment is made based on the detection state of the inlet sensor 179. If no prize has been awarded, the main opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when a winning is generated, the value of the winning counter PC is subtracted by "1" in step S2103, and then the remaining ball counter RPC is incremented by 1 in step S2104. After the execution of step S2104, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the winning counter PC is "0". If it is not "0" and the maximum number of winnings in one round (maximum number of winnings) has not been reached, the opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the winning counter PC is "0" and the number of winning balls in the accessory device 150 has reached the maximum number of winnings in one round, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, a process of clearing the second round counter RC2 to "0" is executed in order to end the current round game.

If the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S2101, that is, if the opening time of the opening / closing accessory 168 has reached the upper limit opening time, the process proceeds to step S2107 and the second round counter RC2 is set. "1" The process of subtracting is executed.

After the execution of step S2106 or step S2107, the closing process is executed in step S2108. In this process, the drive control of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is terminated, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is closed. In the following step S2109, it is determined whether or not the second round counter RC2 is "0". If the second round counter RC2 is not "0", it means that there is a remaining opening in this round game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2110, and the closing time (closing period, waiting period) between each opening is reached. Executes the setting process of. In this process, by referring to the value of the second round counter RC2 and the above-mentioned open / close pattern table (FIG. 32), the current closing time (closing period, waiting period) is grasped, and the closing time corresponds to that time. The numerical value is input to the timer counter T.

On the other hand, if the second round counter RC2 is "0" in step S2109 and there is no remaining opening, the process proceeds to step S2111 and the end waiting time setting process is executed. The end-time waiting time is for waiting for the end of the round game after the final opening and closing of the round game is completed. That is, in the present embodiment, the time when the waiting time at the end has elapsed is the end of the round game. The end-time waiting time is the same as the end-time waiting time related to the first opening / closing execution mode (step S1309 in FIG. 25), and takes into account the period until the game ball winning the accessory device 150 is discharged from the accessory device 150. Is set. That is, a predetermined period (uniformly in the present embodiment) longer than the period (about 3 sec) until the game ball winning the accessory device 150 reaches the V winning sensor 192 via the guide passage 183 on the left side and the rotating body 201. It is set to 3.5 sec). Therefore, at the end of the round game, all the game balls that have won the prize in the bonus device 150 are discharged from the bonus device 150, except for the game balls stored in the bonus device 150.

In step S2111, a process of inputting a value corresponding to 3.5 sec to the end standby time counter provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The end wait time counter is updated (1 decrement) each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed. Therefore, when the counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), the end wait time counter is reached. It becomes possible to grasp what has passed.

In the following step S2112, a shutter setting process for setting the operation mode of the shutter 221 is executed. In this process, the shutter 221 is displaced from the closed state to the open state after the period TT1 (0 sec) has elapsed from the end timing of the round game, and returns to the closed state at the timing when the period TT2 (0.3 sec) has elapsed from the displacement. As described above, the operation mode of the shutter 221 is set. In the present embodiment, since the period TT1 is set to 0 sec, the shutter 221 is displaced to the open state at the end timing of the round game. Further, except for the maintenance period of the open state (period TT2), the shutter 221 is set to maintain the closed state during the execution of the second open / close execution mode.

In step S2112, a value corresponding to the above period TT1 is set in the shutter counter provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. Since the shutter counter is updated (1 decrement) each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, the shutter counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0”), and the displacement timing of the shutter 221 is reached. It becomes possible to grasp.

After the execution of step S2110 or step S2112, the closing command is set in step S2113, and the main opening / closing process is terminated. This set closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This closure command contains information on whether each process for this closure corresponds to the end of one round or for each opening and closing during one round. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to each of the above information based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of the opening / closing process (FIG. 29), if it is determined in step S1708 that the opening / closing accessory 168 is not open, that is, the opening / closing accessory 168 is closed, the process proceeds to step S1710 and the value of the timer counter T is set. Is determined to be "0". The process of this step is a process of determining whether or not the closing time between each opening set in step S2110 (FIG. 35) or the end waiting time set in step S2111 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer counter T is not "0", the main opening / closing process is terminated, while if it is "0", it is determined in step S1711 whether or not the second round counter RC2 is "0". If the second round counter RC2 is not "0", it means that the closing time between each opening has elapsed. In this case, the processing after step S1705 is performed in order to execute the remaining opening in this round game. Execute. On the other hand, when the second round counter RC2 is "0", it means that the waiting time at the end has elapsed, in other words, it is the end timing of the round game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1712. Execute the round update process with. After that, the main opening / closing process is completed.

Here, the round update process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the round update process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "1". Since the round update process is a process executed at the round end timing, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the current round end timing is for the final round in the second open / close execution mode.

If the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "1" and corresponds to the end timing of the round game other than the final round, the process proceeds to step S2202, and whether or not the continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Is determined. This process is the same as the process of step S1801. If the continuation flag is not stored, that is, if the execution mode of the second open / close execution mode is the continuous fluctuation mode, whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S2203. Is determined. That is, in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the continuation condition for the next round game is satisfied. If the V winning flag is stored and the continuation condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2204 to execute a process of clearing the V winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2202 (when the execution mode of the second open / close execution mode is the 16R continuation mode) or after the processing of step S2204 is executed, the first round counter RC1 is set to "1" in step S2205. Subtract to update the number of rounds. In the following step S2206, the closing time (round interval period) setting process between each round is executed. In this process, a numerical value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 sec) is input to the timer counter T. Regarding the closing time between each round set here, the elapsed timing can be grasped by executing the determination process of step S1703 (FIG. 29) in the normal process (open / close process) from the next time onward.

After the execution of step S2206, the round update command is set in step S2207. This set round update command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This round update command includes information such as the closing time between each round set in step S2206 and the number of rounds of the next round game (which round game is). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the round game or the start of the next round based on the received round update command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. do.

On the other hand, when the value of the first round counter RC1 is "1" in the step S2201 (when it is the end timing of the final round), or when the V winning flag is not stored in the step S2203 (the continuation condition is the continuation condition). If not established), the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2208, a process of clearing the value of the first round counter RC1 to "0" is executed in order to end the second open / close execution mode. In the following step S2209, the ending process is executed. In the start process, the waiting time for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in the waiting time counters provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed.

After that, in step S2210, the ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This ending command includes information such as the waiting time for the ending set in step S2209, the type of the second opening / closing execution mode, and the number of times the round game is continued. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the open / close execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 51 so that the display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

After the execution of step S2207 or the execution of step S2210, the process proceeds to step S2211 to execute a process of clearing the round flags stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, and then end the round update process.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 28), after the opening / closing process of step S1613 is executed, the process for the motion unit in the accessory is executed in step S1614. Since the processing in this step is the same as the processing for the moving portion in the accessory in FIG. 26, the same figure will be referred to and described.

In the processing for the accessory moving unit in step S1614, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300. This determination can be made by referring to the value of the first distribution counter set in step S1906 (FIG. 33). Then, when the first distribution counter has a predetermined value (for example, “0”), that is, when the displacement timing is reached, the first distribution control process is executed in step S1402.

In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated, and the first distribution member 300 is changed from the distribution state to the non-displacement state. Displace. When the first distribution drive unit 300a is not in the drive state, the drive is started to displace the first distribution member 300 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. When the distribution state is set, the value corresponding to the distribution state maintenance period TM2 (0.5 sec or 0.1 sec) is input to the first distribution counter.

If it is not the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300 in step S1401, or after the process of step S1402 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing of the second distribution member 310. This determination can be made by referring to the value of the second distribution counter set in step S1906. Then, in the case of the displacement timing, the second distribution control process is executed in step S1404. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated, and the second distribution member 310 is changed from the distribution state to the non-displacement state. Displace. When the second distribution drive unit 310a is not in the drive state, the drive is started to displace the second distribution member 310 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. When the distribution state is set, the value corresponding to the distribution state maintenance period TS2 (0.3 sec or 0.1 sec) is input to the second distribution counter.

If it is not the displacement timing of the second distribution member 310 in step S1403, or after the process of step S1404 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing of the shutter 221. This determination can be made by referring to the value of the shutter counter set in step S2112 (FIG. 35). Then, in the case of the displacement timing, the shutter control process is executed in step S1406. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the shutter drive unit 221a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the shutter drive unit 221a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated and the shutter 221 is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Further, when the shutter drive unit 221a is not in the drive state, the drive is started to displace the shutter 221 from the closed state to the open state. When the open state is set, the value corresponding to the open state maintenance period TT2 (0.3 sec) is input to the shutter counter.

If it is not the displacement timing of the shutter 221 in step S1405, or after the process of step S1406 is executed, the rotating body control process is executed in step S1407. In the process of step S1407, the drive state of the rotating body driving unit 194 is controlled so as to drive and control the rotating body 201 according to the setting content set in the rotating body setting process (FIG. 28) of step S1609. After the execution of step S1407, the processing for the operation unit in the main character is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 28), after executing the process for the moving part in the accessory in step S1614, in step S1615, whether or not there is a V prize and the ejection of the game ball from the accessory device 150 are performed. Execute the process for passing through the accessory for grasping.

Here, the process for passing through the accessory will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.

In the process for passing through the accessory, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the passage of the game ball (generation of V winning) is detected by the V winning sensor 192. When the occurrence of the V winning is detected, the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S2302. In a subsequent step S2303, a process of decrementing the remaining ball counter RPC provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. That is, when the occurrence of the V prize is detected in step S2303, it means that the game ball has been discharged from the accessory device 150 in addition to the occurrence of the V prize. The number of game balls in the object device 150 is updated. After the execution of step S2303, the process for passing through the main character is terminated.

On the other hand, when the occurrence of the V winning is not detected in step S2301, it is determined in step S2304 whether or not the passage (disengagement) of the game ball is detected by the disengagement sensor 193. If the deviation is detected, the process proceeds to step S2303 and the process of decrementing the remaining ball counter RPC by 1 is executed. That is, even when the detachment is detected, the detachment with respect to the game ball is confirmed, and it means that the game ball is discharged from the accessory device 150. Therefore, by reducing the remaining ball counter RPC, the accessory device is used. Update the number of game balls in 150. On the other hand, if the deviation is not detected in step S2304, that is, if neither the V prize nor the deviation can be specified, the process for passing through the main character is terminated without updating the remaining ball counter RPC. ..

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 28), after executing the process of step S1615, it is determined in step S1616 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", and in step S1617. Determine if the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S1618. In this process, a process for returning the game state after the open / close execution mode to the normal game state (normal game state) is performed. For example, the distribution members 300, 310, the shutter 221 and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150 are arranged at the initial positions.

As a normal gaming state, the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operating port 39 changes (for example, the opening / closing mode is easier to win a prize in the second operating port 39 than in other states). In addition, when the game state in which the type and probability of the game result at the time of winning the winnings to the operating ports 38 and 39 changes (for example, the probability of the direct hit result changes) is provided, the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is preferable to configure the game state to be set in the transition process of.

After the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S1618 is completed, the game state transition process is terminated after the end process of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S1619. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the continuation flag or the like used during the open / close execution mode is deleted. Further, in step S1619, information that one open / close execution mode has ended is output externally, such as by stopping the jackpot signal output in step S1611. As a result, the hall computer (management control device) of the amusement park can grasp the start and end of one open / close execution mode.

Next, the remaining ball determination process in step S607 in the normal process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

In the remaining ball determination process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the first open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first open / close execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114.

When the first open / close execution mode flag is stored and the first open / close execution mode is in progress, it is determined in step S2402 whether or not the end waiting time set in step S1309 (FIG. 25) has elapsed. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the waiting time counter at the end is a predetermined value (for example, "0").

If the waiting time at the end has not elapsed, the remaining ball determination process is terminated, while if the waiting time at the end has elapsed, the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0" in step S2403. Judge whether or not. If the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is not "0" and the number of winnings to the bonus device 150 and the number of ejected from the bonus device 150 do not match, the process proceeds to step S2404, and the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are reached. Stores the remaining sphere flag. The remaining ball flag is a flag indicating that a game ball remains in the accessory device 150. When the remaining ball flag is stored in this way, it is determined in the abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 17) of step S107 in the timer interrupt process that the game ball remains, and the game stop determination process of step S601 in the normal process (FIG. 17). After 20), the game is stopped.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2403 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", it is assumed that no game ball remains in the accessory device 150, and the present remaining ball determination process is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2401 that the first open / close execution mode is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S2405 to determine whether or not the second open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second open / close execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114.

When the second open / close execution mode flag is stored and the second open / close execution mode is in progress, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0”. If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S2407, and it is determined whether or not the ending has ended (whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed). When the ending is completed, that is, when the end timing of the second open / close execution mode is reached, the process proceeds to step S2403, and it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0" to determine the remaining ball. Execute the judgment. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S2405 to S2407, the remaining ball determination process is terminated.

<About the flow of games>
Next, the flow of the game in the second opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 39. Here, the description will proceed assuming that the execution mode of the second opening / closing execution mode is the continuous fluctuation mode. In FIG. 39, the numbers in square brackets indicate the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened in one round game. For example, [1] in the second round game means the first opening in the round game.

When the second round round game (the first round round game in the second opening / closing execution mode) is started at the timing t1, the first opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is started (FIGS. 39 (a), (b). )). In the second round game, since the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing accessory 168 is controlled by the opening / closing pattern A (see FIG. 31), the open state of the opening / closing accessory 168 is 1.5 sec from the timing t1 (FIG. 32 (FIG. 32). It is maintained until the timing t3 when a)) has elapsed. At the timing t3, the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched to the closed state, and that state is maintained until the timing t4 after 0.5 sec.

Further, when the first opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is started, the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is controlled with reference to the start timing (timing t1) (FIG. 39 (d)). In the 1st to 6th opening (first game section), since the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is set in the operation pattern SA (see FIG. 34 (b)), 0.5 sec from the timing t1 is set. At the elapsed timing t2, the second distribution member 310 switches from the non-distribution state (state in which the game ball is distributed to the ball distribution unit 185 side) to the distribution state (state in which the game ball is distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 side). Be done. When the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is the operation pattern SA, the distribution state is maintained for 0.3 sec. The operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is also controlled based on the opening start timing of the opening / closing accessory 168, but the illustration is omitted for convenience.

After that, for example, at the timing t5, which is the intermediate timing of the second opening, the game ball wins a prize in the accessory device 150 under the condition that the second distribution member 310 is switched to the distribution state (strictly speaking). When the winning game ball reaches the second distribution member 310), the game ball is distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by the second distribution member 310 (FIGS. 39 (c) and 39 (d)). At this time, the shutter 221 arranged in front of the warp inlet portion 214 is in a closed state in which the warp inlet portion 214 is closed (FIG. 39 (e)). Therefore, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by the second distribution member 310 are stored in the accessory device 150 without reaching the warp inlet portion 214.

After that, another winning ball, which is distributed to the ball distribution unit 185 side by the second distribution member 310 and heads toward the rotating body 201 through the guide passage 183 on the left side, is, for example, at the timing t6 which is the middle timing of the fifth opening. When the rotating body 201 distributes to the V winning opening guide unit 204 and passes through the V winning opening 182a, it is detected by the V winning sensor 192 and the V winning flag is turned on (stored in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114). State) (FIG. 39 (g)). As a result, the round continuation condition is satisfied, and the implementation of the third round game (next round game) is confirmed.

At timing t7, which is the timing during the 14th opening, when the game ball wins the accessory device 150 while the second distribution member 310 is switched to the distribution state, the game ball becomes the second distribution member. It is distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by 310. However, since the game balls are already stored, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side are repelled by the stored game balls and distributed to the guide passage 183 side. In this way, even if a plurality of game balls are distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side at the right time, the number of stored game balls is limited to one.

At the subsequent timing t8, when the number of winning balls to the bonus device 150 reaches 9, which is the upper limit winning number per round, the opening / closing bonus 168 in the second round game is completed. The opening / closing accessory 168 is switched to the closed state. After that, the end of the round game is waited while the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the closed state, and the state is from the closing timing (timing t7) of the opening / closing accessory 168 to the timing t9 when the waiting time at the end (3.5 sec) elapses. Be maintained.

As described above, the waiting time at the end is set in consideration of the period until the game ball winning the bonus device 150 is discharged from the bonus device 150. Therefore, the second round game ends in a state where all the game balls that have won the prize in the accessory device 150 are discharged except for the game balls stored in front of the warp entrance portion 214. Therefore, in the round game, it is avoided that the round game ends before the last winning ball passes through either the V winning opening 182a or the exit opening 182b (before the result for the last winning ball is determined). Therefore, when the number of winning balls to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit winning number per round, the V winning is not generated and the continuation condition (condition for performing the third round game) is established. Even if this is not the case, the continuation condition can be satisfied by the last winning ball passing the V winning. Therefore, it is possible to expect the continuation condition to be satisfied until the final winning ball is discharged.

If the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 after the waiting time at the end has elapsed, it is not treated as a V winning and the continuation condition is not satisfied. That is, the V winning occurs only when the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 before the waiting time at the end elapses. In that sense, the waiting time at the end can be said to be the valid period of the V prize.

When the second round round game is completed at the timing t9, the start of the third round round game is awaited with the opening / closing accessory 168 closed. This state is maintained from the timing t9 until the waiting time (1.5 sec) between rounds elapses.

Further, at the timing t9, the shutter 221 arranged in front of the warp inlet portion 214 is switched from the closed state in which the warp inlet portion 214 is closed to the open state in which the warp inlet portion 214 is opened (FIG. 39 (FIG. 39). e)). As a result, the game ball stored in the accessory device 150 at the entrance guide portion 215 advances to the warp entrance portion 214 and enters the warp passage 210. The game ball that has entered the warp passage 210 is guided to the V guidance passage 260 through the warp outlet portion 216 and the exit guide portion 217 after descending the spiral passage 213, and is guided to the V winning passage 191a (V winning sensor 192). Be taken.

As described above, the period until the game ball stored in front of the warp inlet portion 214 reaches the V winning sensor 192 through the warp passage 210 is about 2 sec. Therefore, the game ball whose storage is released at the timing t9 reaches the V winning sensor 192 after the waiting period (1.5 sec) provided between the second round and the third round has elapsed.

At the timing t10 when the waiting period has elapsed, the third round game is started, and the first opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is started (FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b)). In the third round round game, since the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing accessory 168 is controlled by the opening / closing pattern B (see FIG. 31), the open state of the opening / closing accessory 168 is 1.5 sec from the timing t3 (FIG. 32 (FIG. 32). b) Continues until) elapses.

At the timing t11, which is delayed by about 0.5 sec from the timing t10, the game ball flowing down the warp passage 210 reaches the V winning sensor 192. As described above, this game ball is a game ball that is stored in the accessory device 150 in the second round game and is released from the storage at the end of the round game. That is, the game ball stored in the second round game passes through the V winning sensor 192 at the timing after the start of the third round game and before the end of the third round game. As a result, the V winning flag is turned on in the third round round game, and the execution of the fourth round game is confirmed (FIG. 39 (g)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game balls stored in the accessory device 150 in the second round round game straddle the round game without being discharged from the accessory device 150, and the third round round. In the game, it passes through the V winning sensor 192 (V winning). That is, the game ball that won the accessory device 150 in the second round game is not only the third round game that is the next round game, but also the fourth round game that is the next round game. It also affects the implementation of. Therefore, the player can play the game aiming at the implementation of the fourth round game while playing the second round game.

By the way, if the storage does not occur in the second round game, the above V prize by the storage ball does not occur even if the storage is released. In this case, in the third round round game, if the V prize is won through the distribution by the rotating body 201, the fourth round round game is carried out.

Here, focusing on the method for carrying out the round game of the fourth round, the game ball is stored in the round game of the second round, and the V prize is won by the route of the rotating body 201 in the round game of the third round. There are two things to generate. That is, the opportunity to acquire the license for the fourth round can be given not only to the third round but also to the second round. As a result, it is possible to provide a period during which the game can be played aiming at the implementation of the fourth round over a plurality of rounds of the second and third rounds, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the continuation of the round for a long time.

Further, even if the winning ball cannot be stored in the second round game, if the winning ball in the third round passes V in the round, the implementation of the fourth round can be achieved. The round can be positioned as a re-challenge round. This gives the impression that the fourth round is easy to be carried out, and makes it possible to arouse the motivation to play.

At that time, in the present embodiment, since the stored game ball always reaches the V winning sensor 192 through the warp passage 210, if the storage can be achieved, the V is higher than that through the rotating body 201. The probability of winning is greatly increased. Therefore, not only can the expectation that the game balls are stored be strongly aroused, but also the player can proceed with the game with peace of mind when the game balls are stored. In addition, the required number of game balls to be stored can be kept small, and as a result, the size of the storage area in the accessory device 150 can be reduced. In the accessory device 150, a large number of game parts such as a guide passage 183 which is a flow path of the game ball and a rotating body 201 for distributing the game ball are mounted, and they are compatible with each other when securing a storage area. Be strong. Therefore, by reducing the size of the storage area, it is possible to facilitate the design of the accessory.

On the other hand, the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is shorter than the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state, and the winning ball to the accessory device 150 is used for the entrance by the second distribution member 310. The probability of being distributed to the guide unit 215 side is lower than the probability of being distributed to the ball distribution unit 185 side. As a result, it is suppressed that it becomes excessively advantageous for the player.

In the present embodiment, even if a V prize is generated, the round is held until the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened reaches the upper limit number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened or the total number of game balls to be awarded to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit number. The game is continued. With such a configuration, it is possible to play with the aim of winning up to the maximum number of game balls, even though the game balls released from storage are configured to win a V prize at an early stage of a round game. Not only that, it is also possible to properly secure a period for playing with the aim of new storage.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the storage is released before the start of the third round game, and at the start of the round game, the storage area (entrance guide unit 215) of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is set. It is vacant. Therefore, it is expected that new storage will occur from the beginning of the round game. For example, in a configuration in which storage is released in the middle of a round game, the goal is to generate storage in the remaining time, but according to the present embodiment, storage is performed using the entire round game. It becomes possible to aim for the outbreak.

It is also conceivable that the distance between the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221 is set to be at least twice the diameter of the game ball so that a plurality of game balls can be stored. In this case, if the number of storages is less than the upper limit, the game balls can be newly stored without canceling the storage. Therefore, even if the storage is released in the middle of the round game, the new storage is performed from the beginning of the round game. It becomes possible to anticipate the occurrence. However, in addition to making it difficult to design accessories due to the expansion of the storage area, it is necessary to devise ways to prevent new storage balls from being released at the same time when storage is released. Based on these, it is preferable to use the configuration of the present embodiment.

Further, the storage release of the game ball stored in the second round is executed before the second distribution member 310 is first switched to the distribution state in the third round. In this case, after securing a vacancy in the storage area, the game ball can be distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side. As a result, even though the game ball that has won the prize in the accessory device 150 can be directed toward the entrance guide portion 215, the inconvenience that the storage is hindered by the already stored game ball can be suppressed. Will be possible.

Further, the storage of the stored game ball is not released in the state where the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state, but is performed in the situation where the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the closed state. In the open state where the game ball is easy to win in the accessory device 150, the player's consciousness is easy to concentrate on whether or not the game ball wins. Therefore, if the storage is released in the open state, the player may miss the release of the storage. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, since the storage is released in a closed state in which it is difficult for the accessory device 150 to win a prize, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking.

After the above, for example, at the timing t12, which is the timing during the third opening, when the game ball wins a prize in the accessory device 150 in a situation where the second distribution member 310 is switched to the distribution state, the game is concerned. The sphere is distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by the second distribution member 310 (FIGS. 39 (c) and 39 (d)). At this time, the shutter 221 arranged in front of the warp inlet portion 214 is in a closed state in which the warp inlet portion 214 is closed (FIG. 39 (e)). Therefore, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by the second distribution member 310 are stored in the accessory device 150 without reaching the warp inlet portion 214.

Then, when the third round game is completed at the timing t13, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state (FIG. 39 (e)), and the storage is released. The game ball whose storage has been released reaches the V winning sensor 192 at a timing t15 slightly delayed from the start timing (timing t14) of the fourth round game. As a result, the V winning flag is turned on in the fourth round game, and the execution of the fifth round game is confirmed (FIG. 39 (g)).

<About the playability of each round game>
Next, the playability of each round game in the second open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing the playability of each round game.

The winning characteristic of the bonus device 150 in the second round game is the winning characteristic A (see FIG. 32 (e)) in which the game ball is easily won in the bonus device 150 at each opening from the first to the thirteenth. It has become. On the other hand, the distribution characteristics of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in each opening from the first to the thirteenth time are such that the winning ball reaches the rotating body 201 from the first to the sixth time in the first half. It has an easy distribution characteristic A (see FIG. 34 (c)), and the 7th to 13th times in the latter half have the distribution characteristic B in which the winning ball is easily stored in the accessory device 150. Therefore, in the second round game, it is easy to expect both the V winning (self-sustaining) via the rotating body 201 and the storage of the winning balls.

Since the second round game is the first round game in the second open / close execution mode, the winning ball is not carried over from the previous round game by the stored ball. Therefore, in order to carry out the third round round game, it is necessary to win a V prize via the rotating body 201 in the second round round game. Therefore, by making the game playable as described above, it is easy to generate the above V prize, and it is suppressed that the difficulty level of the third round is excessively high.

By the way, the round game is configured to end when the number of winning balls to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit number (9 pieces). Therefore, the round game may end in the middle of the second game section. In this case, if the state in which the winning ball is likely to be stored in the accessory device 150 is generated before the state in which the winning ball easily reaches the rotating body 201, the round is made before or early after switching to the latter state. There is a risk that the game will end and the opportunity to continue on its own (V prize for carrying out the third round) will not be provided satisfactorily. As a result, even though the game balls are stored in the second round and the right to execute the fourth round is acquired, the third round is not carried out and the above storage is likely to be nullified. ..

In this respect, in the present embodiment, in the second round, the state in which the winning ball easily reaches the rotating body 201 is generated before the state in which the winning ball is easily stored in the accessory device 150. With such a configuration, an opportunity to continue on its own is suitably secured, and the third round is easy to be carried out. This makes it easier to provide the playability of confirming the implementation of the third round and then aiming to acquire the implementation right of the fourth round.

The winning characteristic of the bonus device 150 in the third round game is the winning characteristic B (see FIG. 32 (e)) in which the game ball is easily won in the bonus device 150 at each opening from the 7th to the 13th. It has become. On the other hand, as for the distribution characteristics of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in each opening from the 7th to the 13th times, the winning balls are stored in the accessory device 150 as in the case of the second round. It has an easy distribution characteristic B. For this reason, in the third round game, the game has a weight placed on the game in which the winning balls are stored in the accessory device 150.

In this case, if the winning balls can be stored in the second round, the stored balls will win a V in the third round, the implementation of the fourth round will be confirmed, and the winning balls will be stored in the third round. If you can, you can get the right to execute the fifth round. On the other hand, if the winning balls cannot be stored in the second round, even if the winning balls are stored in the third round, the fourth round may not be carried out, so the fifth round is not necessarily carried out. Not exclusively. As described above, in the round game in which the winning ball is stored in the accessory device 150, the game result (whether or not the winning ball can be stored) in the previous round has a great influence.

It should be noted that it is not impossible to win a prize in the accessory device 150 in each of the 1st to 6th and 14th to 19th openings in the 3rd round. Therefore, although it is more difficult than the second round, it is possible to win a V prize via the rotating body 201 in the third round game. The playability of the round games of the 4th to 7th rounds is the same as the playability of the 3rd round.

The winning characteristic of the accessory device 150 in the 8th to 11th round round games is the winning characteristic D (FIG. 32 (FIG. 32), in which the game ball is easily won in the accessory device 150 at each opening from the 14th to the 19th rounds. e) See). That is, in the round games of the 8th to 11th rounds, it is difficult to win a prize in the accessory device 150 at each opening of the 1st to 13th rounds. Therefore, in these round games, it is difficult for both the storage of the game ball and the V prize via the rotating body 201 to occur until the end of the round game, and the round game may end without both of them occurring. It becomes a playability that incites a feeling of impatience.

On the other hand, the distribution characteristics of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in each opening from the 14th to the 19th are such that the winning ball is easily stored in the accessory device 150 and reaches the rotating body 201. It has a distribution characteristic C that is easy to do. That is, at the end of the round where a prize is likely to occur in the accessory device 150, both the storage of the game ball and the V prize via the rotating body 201 are likely to occur.

The winning characteristic of the accessory device 150 in the 12th to 16th round games is the winning characteristic C (FIG. 32 (FIG. 32)) in which the game ball is easily won in the accessory device 150 at each opening from the first to the sixth round. e) See). On the other hand, the distribution characteristics of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in each opening from the first to the sixth time are the distribution characteristics A in which the winning ball easily reaches the rotating body 201. Therefore, in these round games, the playability is such that the V prize (continuation by oneself) via the rotating body 201 is emphasized.

In this way, in one round, the game that stores the winning balls is given weight, while in the other rounds, the game that achieves self-sustaining is given weight, and the playability is different depending on the round. As a result, it is possible to enjoy a plurality of games in one second opening / closing execution mode, and it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the games.

At that time, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201 are standardized in each round, and the playability is made different depending on the opening / closing pattern of each round. In this case, it is not necessary to finely set both the operation pattern of the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201 and the opening / closing pattern in each round, and it is sufficient to set only the opening / closing pattern. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main control device 81 and the work load at the time of designing the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the above configuration is expected to have the following effects. In a configuration in which the winning ball to the bonus device 150 is in an advantageous state (round continuation) by winning a V, the whereabouts of the game ball winning the bonus device 150 is likely to attract the attention of the player. In this case, it is assumed that the player is keenly interested in the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201 that influence the flow of the winning ball, and is paying close attention to their movements. Under such circumstances, if the movement patterns of the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201 are different in each round, the player may notice it and be awakened by understanding that the change in characteristics is pre-engineered. be. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the movements of the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201 are common in each round, such awareness can be suppressed. This makes it easier to feel that the difference in the ease of storage between rounds is due to chance, and it is possible to suitably provide the fun of enjoying the behavior of the game ball.

<About the flow of monitoring the remaining balls>
Next, the flow of monitoring the remaining balls will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of monitoring the remaining balls.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning ball to the bonus device 150 can be stored in the bonus device 150 in each round game, and the stored ball can be stored in the bonus device 150 in the later round game. It is supposed to be discharged from. Therefore, in the round game in which the accumulation occurs, the number of ejected balls is smaller than the number of winning balls at the end of the round game. In this case, if the determination process of the remaining ball is performed for each round, the remaining ball may be abnormal frequently even though the game is played normally, and the progress of the game may be hindered.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, the determination process of the remaining sphere is not performed for each round, but is performed only once at the end of the second opening / closing execution mode (timing t18). As a result, although the game ball that has won the prize in the accessory device 150 can be discharged in the next round, it is possible to prevent the remaining ball from becoming abnormal frequently and to smoothly proceed with the game.

Here, the flow of monitoring the remaining spheres using the determination processing of the remaining spheres can be summarized as follows. The monitoring of the remaining spheres in the second open / close execution mode is performed based on the remaining sphere counter RPC as described above (see step S2411 in FIG. 38). The remaining ball counter RPC is updated from the start to the end of the second open / close execution mode without being cleared in the middle of the second open / close execution mode. Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter RPC is 0 at the end of the ending, and if it is not 0 (when the number of winning balls and the number of ejected balls do not match), it is determined that the remaining balls are abnormal.

That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining ball monitoring is finally performed from the start timing to the end timing of the second opening / closing execution mode, specifically, from the timing when the bonus device 150 is first won in the second round. In the 16th round, which is the round, the period until the final winning ball is discharged from the accessory device 150 is set as the monitoring target period.

However, even if the number of ejected balls from the accessory device 150 is counted, it is not possible to specify which ejected ball is the final ball. Therefore, in the present embodiment, all the winning balls to the accessory device 150 are ejected. At the end of the ending, which is expected to have happened, the remaining spheres are judged. If the second open / close execution mode does not continue until the 16th round and ends in the middle of the round, that round becomes the final round, and the remaining ball determination process is performed at the end of the ending performed after the end of the round. ..

Here, as an event in which the remaining ball becomes abnormal, for example, an illegal ball to which a thread is attached is inserted into the accessory device 150, and the illegal ball is operated through the thread to illegally win a V prize. It is possible that it was broken. In this case, if the illegal ball is operated so as to repeatedly pull and loosen the thread so as to repeatedly pass the V winning sensor 192, the number of winning balls in the accessory device 150 is more than the number of balls ejected from the accessory device 150. The number increases and the two do not match.

If it is determined that the remaining ball is abnormal due to such an event, the game is stopped and the game progress is stopped. If it is determined that the remaining ball is abnormal, an external signal indicating the occurrence of the remaining ball abnormality is output to the management control device on the playground side. By these processes, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts are suppressed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The game balls that have won the prize in the bonus device 150 can be stored in the bonus device 150, and the stored balls can pass through the V winning sensor 192 (V winning opening 182a) in the next round game. Normally, the round game in which the right to be granted by the winning ball in one round game is the next round from the viewpoint of the round game in which the winning is generated, but in this embodiment, the above winning balls are used to make one round after another. It is possible to acquire the license and realize a novel playability.

At that time, if the winning game balls are not stored in the accessory device 150, the winning balls can pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the round game in which the winning is generated. In this case, for example, focusing on the implementation of the fourth round, the opportunity to acquire the execution right of the round is given over a plurality of rounds of the second and third rounds. As a result, the expectation for the continuation of the round can be maintained for a long time, and it becomes possible to improve the interest.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the distribution mode of the second distribution member 310 and the execution timing of the remaining ball determination are different from those in the first embodiment. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second opening / closing execution mode.

The distribution mode of the second distribution member 310 in the second to fourth rounds is the same as that of the first embodiment. That is, after 0.5 sec has elapsed from the start timing of each opening in each round game, the game ball won in the accessory device 150 is switched to the distribution state of distributing to the entrance guide portion 215 side, and then 0.3 sec. The state is maintained in the meantime (see FIG. 34 (b)).

On the other hand, in the fifth round game, as shown in FIG. 42, the second distribution member 310 receives the game ball that has won the prize in the accessory device 150 from the start to the end of the round game. It is maintained in a non-distribution state in which it is distributed to the guide passage 183 side. That is, in the fifth round game, the second distribution member 310 cannot be switched to the distribution state (see FIG. 42 (b)).

Therefore, in the fifth round game, the game ball that has won the bonus device 150 cannot move to the entrance guide portion 215, and the storage of the game ball in the bonus device 150 is restricted. Although not shown in FIG. 42, the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing accessory 168, the distribution mode of the first distribution member 300, and the operation mode of the rotating body 201 are the same as those of the first embodiment. Is.

Further, in the present embodiment, the remaining ball is determined at the end of the fifth round game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter RPC is 0 at the timing when the waiting time at the end has elapsed after the end of the final opening / closing in the 5th round. If the remaining ball counter RPC is not 0, it is considered that the remaining ball is abnormal, and the remaining ball flag is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 114. That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining ball determination is performed in the middle of the second opening / closing execution mode.

Here, an example of the flow of the round game from the second round to the fifth round will be described. Here, in each of the second to fifth rounds, it is assumed that the same number of game balls as the upper limit number (9 pieces) is awarded to the accessory device 150. Further, in each of the second to fourth rounds, the timing at which the second distribution member 310 is switched to the distribution state and the timing at which the game ball wins the accessory device 150 match, and the accessory It is assumed that the game ball is stored in the device 150.

When the game balls are stored in the second round game (timing t21), the game balls are maintained in the stored state until the end of the round. Then, at the timing t22 at which the second round game ends, the shutter 221 is switched to the open state, so that the storage is released. Since it takes a predetermined movement period (about 2 sec) for the game ball whose storage has been released to reach the V winning sensor 192, the game ball has a V winning sensor 192 after the third round game is started. Is reached (timing t23).

That is, the stored game balls are discharged from the accessory device 150 only after the third round game is started. Therefore, at the timing t22, which is the end of the second round game, the number of game balls ejected from the character device 150 is one less than the number of game balls won in the character device 150. Become.

In the third round round game, the game ball released from storage in the second round game reaches the V winning sensor 192, so that the number of ejected balls is incremented by one. However, the game balls are stored at the timing t24, and the game balls that have won the accessory device 150 during the third round are carried over to the fourth round. Since the added amount is offset by this carry-over amount, the number of game balls ejected from the accessory device 150 is still one less even at the timing t25 at the end of the third round game.

Similarly, at timing t27, which is the end of the fourth round game, the winning balls are accumulated in the middle of the fourth round (timing t26), so that the number of game balls ejected from the accessory device 150 is 1. It will be in a state of few pieces. That is, at the end of each of the second to fourth rounds, the number of winnings and the number of ejections cannot match even if the game is played normally, so the remaining ball determination is not performed at these timings.

In the fifth round round game, the game ball released from storage in the fourth round game reaches the V winning sensor 192, so that the number of ejected balls is incremented by 1 (timing t28). Further, in the fifth round game, the storage of the game balls is restricted, so that all the game balls won in the fifth round are discharged during the fifth round. Therefore, when the number of prizes and the number of discharges are compared for only 5 rounds, the number of prizes discharged is one more than the number of prizes. This surplus makes up for the shortage of the number of discharged pieces that occurred at the end of the fourth round, and the total number of winnings and the number of discharged pieces match.

For the player, although the storage was possible up to the 4th round, in the 5th round, the second distribution member 310 suddenly became unable to switch to the distribution state, and the game ball Storage becomes impossible. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may be mistaken for a failure. Therefore, it is preferable to notify the player by notification that storage is possible in the second to fourth rounds, but not in the fifth round. In such a configuration, in the round game of the second round to the fourth round, the display screen G of the accessory device 150 is used for specific notification such as character display, character display, background display, etc., which suggests that storage is possible. On the other hand, it may be configured not to perform it in the fifth round game, or it may be configured to perform different notifications in each round game of the second to fourth rounds and the fifth round.

At the timing t29, which is the end of the fifth round game, the remaining ball determination is performed. That is, the remaining ball determination is performed with the monitoring target period from the second round to the fifth round. As described above, in the situation where the game is normally played, the number of winnings and the number of ejections usually match, and the remaining ball counter RPC becomes 0. In this case, the remaining ball abnormality is not recognized, and the game after the sixth round is continued. On the other hand, for example, when the act of repeatedly passing the V winning sensor 192 by an illegal ball to which a thread is attached is performed, the number of ejected balls becomes larger than the number of winning balls, resulting in an abnormality in the remaining balls.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in order to provide a round game in which storage is restricted and to determine the remaining balls at the end of the round game, the winning balls are discharged in the next round. , The remaining ball can be determined in the middle of the second opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to quickly grasp the abnormality of the remaining ball, and it is possible to prevent the damage to the amusement park from becoming large when a fraudulent act is performed.

As in the case of the 2nd to 4th rounds, in the 6th to 9th rounds, the storage of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is allowed, and in the 10th round, the storage is restricted. Will be done. Further, in the 11th to 15th rounds of the round game, the storage of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is allowed, and in the 16th round of the round game, the storage is restricted. Then, at the end of the 10th and 16th round round games (timing t30, t31), the remaining ball determination is performed. That is, in one second open / close execution mode, the remaining ball determination is performed every predetermined number of rounds.

It should be noted that the round in which the storage is regulated and the remaining ball is determined is arbitrary, and is not limited to the 5th, 10th, and 16th rounds. Further, the number of rounds for which storage is regulated is also arbitrary, and for example, a configuration may be configured in which storage is regulated only once in the eighth round and the remaining ball determination is performed.

When it is determined that the remaining ball is abnormal, the game shifts to the game stop state as in the first embodiment. By the way, the residual ball abnormality is not limited to fraudulent activity, and may occur even when the storage is not properly released due to a malfunction of the shutter 221. For example, if the shutter 221 is not switched to the open state at the end of the 4th round for some reason, the game ball remains in the accessory device 150, and the number of ejected balls is discharged at the end of the 5th round. Is one less than the number of winnings.

As described above, since the residual ball abnormality is not always caused by fraudulent activity, it is desirable to be able to change the response when the residual ball abnormality occurs depending on whether or not it is based on the fraudulent activity. Therefore, the present embodiment has the following configuration.

After the transition to the game stop state, the power switch 92b is operated by the staff of the game hall to turn off and on the power of the pachinko machine 10 in order to release it, but at that time, the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed. If the power is turned on while doing so, the initialization process (step S509) of the RAM 114 is executed in the main process (FIG. 18). As a result, the V prize (timing t28 in FIG. 42) in the fifth round round game is invalidated, and it becomes impossible to play the continuation of the second open / close execution mode (sixth round round game).

On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 98a, the initialization process of the RAM 114 (step S509) is not executed. Further, by the process of steps S512 and S513 in the main process, the state of the remaining ball abnormality is also canceled, and the game state is returned to the game state before the game is changed to the game stop state. As a result, the V prize in the fifth round becomes valid, and it becomes possible to continue playing.

With such a configuration, if fraudulent activity is confirmed when a staff member of the game hall rushes under the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while operating the RAM erase switch 98a. After that, it is suppressed that the fraudsters continue to receive unfair profits. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that it is not fraudulent activity, or if fraudulent activity is not confirmed, by turning on the power without operating the RAM erase switch 98a, it becomes possible to continue playing the game, which is in the interest of the player. Can be suppressed from being impaired.

Further, when a difference is provided between a legitimate player and a cheating person, the following configuration may be used.

First, the shutter 221 is closed when the game is stopped. That is, when the shutter 221 is in the closed state at the time of transition to the game stop state, the operation of the shutter 221 is controlled so that the closed state is maintained even after the transition to the game stop state. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the accessory device 150, the storage state is not released and the game shifts to the game stop state.

After that, in order to release the game stop state, the power switch 92b is operated by the staff of the game hall or the like to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10, but even in that case, the shutter 221 is maintained in the closed state. That is, the storage state is maintained even after the power is turned off. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, when the shutter drive unit 221a is not driven, the shutter 221 is closed. Therefore, it is not necessary to supply the backup power to the shutter drive unit 221a at the time of power failure. In a configuration in which the shutter 221 is closed by driving the shutter drive unit 221a, backup power may be supplied to the shutter drive unit 221a to bring it into an excited state.

Then, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erasing switch 98a after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 is started up without switching the shutter 221 to the open state. In this case, the process of steps S512 and S513 in the main process (FIG. 18) cancels the state of the remaining ball abnormality and returns to the game state before shifting to the game stop state. Also in this case, the stored state is maintained without switching the shutter 221 to the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the remaining ball abnormality and the game stop state with the stored balls remaining. As a result, the remaining stored balls can be used as service balls to play the continuation of the game interrupted by the game stop process. That is, the 6th round game is normally a round in which there is no carry-over ball from the previous round, but when the game is stopped due to a malfunction of the shutter 221 or the like, there is a carry-over ball. It becomes possible to play the sixth round.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed, the RAM initialization process is executed and the continuation cannot be played, so that the service ball as described above cannot be provided. When the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed, the shutter drive unit 221a is driven to switch the shutter 221 to the open state. Specifically, after making an affirmative determination in step S503 of the main process (FIG. 18), a process of switching the shutter 221 to the open state is executed before setting interrupt permission in step S516. As a result, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the accessory device 150 to operate the second distribution member 310 and the game ball is illegally stored, the stored ball is used for fraudulent activity again. Can be suppressed.

At that time, the interrupt permission setting process (step S516) is executed after the predetermined standby time has elapsed. That is, when the shutter 221 is switched to the open state when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, the V winning is enabled after the predetermined standby time has elapsed after the RAM erasing switch 98a is operated. In this case, the predetermined waiting time is set to be longer than the required period until the game ball released from storage reaches the V winning sensor 192. With such a configuration, the game ball released from storage at the time of startup passes through the V winning sensor 192, resulting in a V winning or V winning error (V winning occurs at a timing at which the V winning should not occur). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an error).

Instead of the standby process, the interrupt enable setting process may be performed after the emission confirmation process is performed. That is, it may be configured to grasp that the game ball released from storage has been discharged from the accessory device 150 based on the detection of the passage of the V winning sensor 192, and then set the interrupt permission.

Further, by setting the shutter 221 to be in the open state when the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 98a is pressed, it is possible to confirm the operation of the shutter 221 by a staff member or the like. That is, although the fraudulent activity has not been found, when it is necessary to confirm whether the shutter 221 operates correctly, this can be done by operating the RAM erase switch 98a.

In the above embodiment, the remaining ball is determined at the end of the fifth round, but the remaining ball is determined in the waiting period (round interval period) provided between the fifth round and the sixth round. It may be configured to make a determination. In short, the remaining ball determination may be performed in response to the end of the fifth round, and the execution timing of the remaining ball determination may be after the end of the fifth round and before the start of the sixth round. If so, it is optional. This also applies to the remaining ball determination performed at the end of the 10th and 16th rounds.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 in the second opening / closing execution mode, the distribution mode of the second distribution member 310, and the execution timing of the remaining ball determination are different from those of the above embodiments. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening / closing pattern table of the opening / closing accessory 168 according to the present embodiment. In the figure, the same components as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing patterns B'to D'shown in FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (c) are set instead of the opening / closing patterns B to D shown in FIGS. 32 (b) to 32 (d). These opening / closing patterns B'to D'are defined by the opening / closing pattern table stored in the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113.

As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (c), each opening / closing pattern table is used for the first game section corresponding to the opening from the first to the second and the opening from the third to the eighth. After dividing into the corresponding 2nd game section, the 3rd game section from the 9th to the 13th time, and the 4th game section from the 14th to the 19th time, the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing accessory 168 for each game section. Is specified.

In the opening / closing patterns B'to D', the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball is set in the first to second times (RC2 = 19 to 18) belonging to the first game section during the 19 times of opening in one round game. A shorter opening of 0.1 sec is performed, and then a closing of 0.5 sec is performed (also referred to as a short opening mode). Then, in the subsequent game section, either the opening / closing pattern P1 or P2 is set as in the case of FIG. 32. Both of these opening / closing patterns P1 and P2 have a longer opening time than the short opening mode. That is, in the present embodiment, in each opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing patterns B'to D', the opening / closing combination is performed in a short opening mode in which the opening period is relatively short from the start of the round game until the predetermined period elapses. The object 168 is controlled, and then the opening / closing accessory 168 is controlled by the opening / closing pattern P1 or P2 having a relatively long open state.

Here, in the short opening mode, the period of being in the open state is as short as 0.1 sec. Further, the period of the closed state in the short opening mode is 0.5 sec, which is relatively longer than the opening period. That is, under the situation where the opening / closing accessory 168 is controlled in the short opening mode, most of them are in the closed state, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched to the open state only for a moment. Therefore, in the short opening mode, the winning of the game ball to the accessory device 150 does not occur. In this sense, the short-opening mode can also be said to be a winning regulation mode that regulates the winning of the accessory device 150.

Next, the remaining ball determination process executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the remaining ball determination process according to the present embodiment. The processes of steps S2701 to S2703 shown in FIG. 44 are executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S2405 of FIG. 38, and are executed in place of the processes of steps S2406 and S2407 of FIG. 38. ..

If it is determined in step S2405 that the second open / close execution mode is in progress, it is determined in step S2701 whether or not it is the execution timing of the remaining ball determination. In the present embodiment, when the second open / close execution mode is executed, the remaining ball determination is performed corresponding to each round. Specifically, the remaining ball determination is performed at the timing when a predetermined period (1 sec) has elapsed from the start of each round game.

The elapsed period from the start of the round game is grasped by using the determination counters provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. That is, a value corresponding to 1 sec is set in the determination counter, and this is updated (subtracted) by the timer interrupt process, and the like is updated at a predetermined cycle. Then, when the determination counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), it is possible to grasp that the execution timing of the remaining ball determination has arrived.

If it is determined in step S2701 that it is not the execution timing of the remaining ball determination, the remaining ball determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an execution timing for the remaining ball determination, the process proceeds to step S2702, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", and the remaining ball determination is performed. The remaining ball determination in this case covers the period from the execution of one remaining ball determination to the execution of the next remaining ball determination. By the way, the remaining ball counter RPC is incremented by 1 each time a prize is detected in the accessory device 150 (step S2104 in FIG. 35), and 1 day is detected each time the discharge of the game ball from the accessory device 150 is detected. It is clipped (step S2303 in FIG. 37).

If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2703, assuming that the game ball remains in the accessory device 150, and the remaining ball flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. do. After that, the present remaining ball determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2703 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", it is assumed that no game ball remains in the accessory device 150, and the present remaining ball determination process is terminated as it is.

<About the flow of games>
Next, the flow of the game according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second opening / closing execution mode. Here, the description will proceed assuming that the game balls are stored in the accessory device 150 in the middle of the second round.

When the second round game is completed at the timing t41, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball stored in the entrance guide portion 215 moves toward the warp passage 210. At the same time, the waiting state (round interval) for waiting for the start of the third round game is set, and the waiting state is continued for 1.5 sec. Here, it takes about 2 sec for the game ball whose storage is released to reach the V winning sensor 192, and this time is about 0.5 sec longer than the duration of the round interval. Therefore, the game ball whose storage has been released reaches the V winning sensor 192 about 0.5 sec after the start of the third round game (timing t43).

When the third round game is started at the timing t42, the opening / closing accessory 168 is controlled to open / close in a short opening mode. Since the short-open mode repeats the open state for 0.1 sec and the closed state for 0.5 sec twice, the execution period of the short-open mode is 1.2 sec in total (timing). t45).

Further, at the timing t44 1 sec after the start of the third round game, the remaining ball determination corresponding to the second round game is performed. That is, it is determined whether or not all the game balls that have won the bonus device 150 in the second round game have been ejected from the bonus device 150. That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining ball determination corresponding to the second round game is determined for a predetermined period from the end of the second round (1.5 sec, which is the period of the round interval, and 2.5 sec, which is the sum of the above 1 sec. ) Has elapsed, and it is configured to be executed. If the number of winning balls to the bonus device 150 and the number of ejected game balls from the bonus device 150 do not match in the determination process, it is treated as a residual ball abnormality.

Similarly, at the end of the third round round game, the storage is released (timing t46), and about 0.5 sec of the game ball for which the storage is released has elapsed after the start of the fourth round game. To reach the V winning sensor 192 (timing t48). Further, the opening / closing accessory 168 is controlled to open / close in a short opening mode until 1.2 sec elapses from the start of the fourth round (timing t50), and at the timing t49 1 sec elapses from the start of the fourth round. The remaining ball is determined. This remaining ball determination corresponds to the round game of the third round. That is, it is a process of confirming whether all the game balls that have won the bonus device 150 in the third round game have been ejected from the bonus device 150.

Here, the relationship between the number of winning game balls to the bonus device 150 and the number of game balls ejected from the bonus device 150 will be described. Here, the above relationship will be described for the period from timing t45 to t50.

When the short opening mode ends at the timing t45, the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched to either the opening / closing pattern P1 or P2. In these opening / closing modes, the prize device 150 is allowed to win a prize, so that the prize is generated between the timings t45 and t46. Then, among the game balls that have won the prize in the bonus device 150, the game balls other than the stored game balls are discharged from the bonus device 150 by the timing t46 when the third round ends. Therefore, at the timing t46, the number of the game balls ejected from the bonus device 150 is one less than the number of winning balls of the game balls to the bonus device 150.

When the fourth round is started at the timing t47, the opening / closing accessory 168 is controlled to open / close in a short opening mode from the timing t47 to the timing t50 where 1.2 sec elapses. In the short opening mode, since the game ball cannot be won in the accessory device 150, no new prize is generated during the timings t47 to t50.

Here, 1.2 sec, which is the execution period of the short opening mode, is longer than the elapsed period (about 0.5 sec) from the start of the fourth round until the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192. .. Therefore, the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 during the execution of the short opening mode. As described above, since no new winning is generated during the execution of the short opening mode, the number of winning balls to the accessory device 150 and the accessory at the timing t48 when the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192. The number of game balls ejected from the device 150 matches.

This state is maintained until the timing t50 at which the short opening mode ends. Therefore, the residual sphere abnormality is appropriately determined by performing the residual sphere determination at the timing t49, which is the timing after the storage release sphere reaches the V winning sensor 192 and before the end of the short opening mode. Can be done.

As described above, during the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is controlled to open / close in the short opening mode, the gaming ball stored in the previous round game is passed through the V winning sensor 192. It is possible to pass the storage release ball through V while avoiding the period when the ball wins a prize. As a result, it is possible to suppress the mixture of the storage release ball and the winning ball in the accessory device 150, and it is possible to make it easy to understand which game ball has passed V.

In addition, since the configuration is such that the remaining ball is determined while the short opening mode is being executed and the storage release ball has passed V, the remaining ball can be determined for each round even while the game ball is carried over. , It becomes possible to make a pachinko machine 10 that is extremely strong against residual ball abnormalities. Further, since the remaining ball determination is performed in duplicate with the round game, the smooth progress of the game can be promoted as compared with the case where the round game is started after the remaining ball determination is performed.

Since the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state even in the short opening mode, a prize may occur depending on the flow condition of the game ball. In this case, if it is immediately determined that the remaining ball is abnormal due to the disagreement between the number of winnings and the number of ejected balls, the game is likely to be interrupted due to an erroneous determination. Therefore, if the discrepancy between the number of winnings and the number of ejected pieces is once, the remaining ball is not abnormal, and if it is continuous a plurality of times (for example, twice), the remaining ball is abnormal.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the second open / close execution mode, in the second round game, which is the first round, there is no carry-over (storage) of the game ball from the previous round game, so the rotating body 201 is used in the second round game. Unless you achieve the V prize (continuation on your own) via, you cannot carry out the third round or later. For this reason, compared to the third and subsequent round games in which a carry-over ball can be expected, the difficulty of acquiring the right to execute the next round becomes higher, and the second open / close execution mode may end by the second round. easy.

In particular, if the game ball can be stored in the accessory device 150 in the second round, but the self-continuation cannot be achieved, the second opening / closing execution mode is not only terminated early, and the second opening / closing execution mode is not only terminated. The precious storage ball will be ruined. In this case, the player's disappointment is great, and there is a risk of diminishing the player's willingness to play. The present embodiment is intended to provide relief in such a case, and the configuration thereof will be described in detail below.

In this embodiment, the switching mode of the shutter 221 is different from that of each of the above embodiments. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an open middle process executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 in the present embodiment. Here, the processes of steps S2801 to S2804 shown in FIG. 46 are executed between steps S2104 and S2105 in the open intermediate process of FIG. 35. The opening process in FIG. 35 is a process for switching the opening / closing accessory 168 from the open state to the closed state in the second opening / closing execution mode.

After updating the remaining ball counter RPC in step S2104, it is determined in step S2801 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "15". The first round counter RC1 counts the round number of the round game, and in step S2801, whether or not the round game being executed is the first round (second round) in the second open / close execution mode. Is determined.

If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "15" and the round game being executed is the second round, the process proceeds to step S2802, and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "1". .. The winning counter PC counts the number of winnings of the game ball to the accessory device 150, and the value thereof indicates the number of remaining winnings up to the upper limit winning number (9 pieces). In step S2802, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 is the remaining one up to the upper limit winning number.

When the value of the winning counter PC is "1" and the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 is one remaining up to the upper limit winning number, V winning is given to the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S2803. Determine if the flag is stored. That is, in the second round game, it is determined whether or not the V winning (self-sustaining) via the rotating body 201 has been achieved.

If the V winning flag is not stored and the self-continuation has not been achieved, the shutter release process is executed in step S2804. In step S2804, the shutter drive unit 221a is driven to switch the shutter 221 from the closed state to the open state. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the entrance guide portion 215 (see FIG. 8), the storage is released and the game ball moves toward the V winning sensor 192 through the warp passage 210.

After the execution of step S2804, the process proceeds to step S2105, and a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" is performed. Further, when a negative determination is made in steps S2801 and S2802, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S2803, the process proceeds to step S2105.

<About the flow of games>
Next, the flow of the game according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second round game. Here, the description will proceed assuming that the game balls are stored in the accessory device 150 at the timing t51 in the middle of the second round.

At the timing t52, when the eighth game ball wins the accessory device 150 (FIG. 47 (c)), it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. In the example shown in FIG. 47, since the V winning flag is not stored (FIG. 47 (g)), the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state at the same timing t52 (FIG. 47 (e)). As a result, the storage of the game ball is released (FIG. 47 (f)).

The movement time until the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 is about 2 sec, but each round game in the second opening / closing execution mode is provided with a waiting time at the end of 3.5 sec. Therefore, the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 at the timing t53 before the timing t54 at which the second round ends (FIG. 47 (g)). As a result, a V prize is generated in the second round game, and the right to execute the third round is acquired.

In this way, it is determined whether or not V has passed (whether or not self-continuation has been achieved) at a specific timing in the second round (when there is only one remaining until the maximum number of winnings), and V has passed. If not, the shutter 221 is opened to release the storage, and V is passed in the second round game, so that the inconvenience that the third round is not performed even though the game ball is stored can be avoided. ..

Since the opening process of the shutter 221 is performed regardless of the presence or absence of storage, the shutter 221 is released at the timing t52 even when there is no storage ball in the second round game. However, since there are no stored balls, no V prize will be awarded. In other words, the above remedy works only when the storage can be achieved in the second round game, and there is a difference in the degree of preferential treatment between the case where the storage is not achieved. ..

Further, although not shown in FIG. 47, when the V winning flag is stored at the timing t52, that is, when the self-continuation can be achieved, the shutter 221 is not released at the timing t53, and the above-mentioned first. Similar to the first embodiment, the shutter 221 is released at the timing t54 at which the second round ends. Therefore, the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 in the third round, and thereby the execution right of the fourth round is acquired. That is, it is a configuration that is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the self-continuation cannot be achieved in the second round.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the opening standby time (opening timing) in the first opening / closing execution mode, the switching mode of the shutter 221 and the execution timing of the remaining ball determination are different from those of the above embodiments.

Briefly explaining the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, the characters are stored in the accessory device 150 after a predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the second opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result). It is configured to release the storage of game balls. Then, if the timing at which the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 and the execution timing of the first opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution mode based on the normal opening / closing result) after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode are well matched. , The second open / close execution mode by the storage release ball is generated. In the present embodiment, for convenience, the description will proceed assuming that the upper limit of the number of common reservations is one.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening timing table according to the present embodiment. The release timing table is stored in the release timing table storage area 113c in the ROM 113.

In the opening timing table, the opening waiting time is defined in association with the opening type counter CS. Here, the opening waiting time is the waiting time from winning the operating ports 38 and 39 to opening the opening / closing accessory 168 when there is no holding information, and when there is holding information, when the holding information is exhausted ( It is a waiting time from (when the pass / fail determination process of step S805 (FIG. 21) is performed for the reserved information) to the opening of the opening / closing accessory 168.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the opening table according to the present embodiment, two types of opening waiting time, 0.5 sec and 2.5 sec, are set. The open waiting time of 0.5 sec corresponds to the opening type counter CS "0" to "89", and the opening waiting time of 2.5 sec corresponds to the opening type counter CS "90" to "99". There is. That is, the probability that the open waiting time of 0.5 sec is selected is 9/10, and the probability that the open waiting time of 2.5 sec is selected is 1/10, and the latter probability is lower. ..

Next, the remaining ball determination process executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (a). The process of FIG. 49 (a) is executed in place of the remaining ball determination process of FIG. 38 according to the first embodiment.

In the remaining ball determination process according to the present embodiment, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The determination standby flag indicates that the player is waiting for the execution of the remaining ball determination process after the end of the second open / close execution mode, and is set at the end of the second open / close execution mode.

If the determination standby flag is not stored, it is determined in step S3002 whether or not the first open / close execution mode is being executed. If the first open / close execution mode is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3003, and the processes of steps S3003 to S3005 are executed. Since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S2402 to S2404 of FIG. 38, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if the first open / close execution mode is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S3006, and it is determined whether or not the second open / close execution mode is being executed. When the second open / close execution mode is being executed, it is determined in step S3007 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0”. When the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S3008, and it is determined whether or not the ending has ended, that is, whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed.

If the ending is completed, the shutter setting process is executed in step S3009. In this process, the operation mode of the shutter 221 is set so that the shutter 221 switches from the closed state to the open state after a predetermined period (3.5 sec) has elapsed from the end timing (ending end timing) of the second open / close execution mode. .. The maintenance period of the open state is arbitrary, but is set to 0.3 sec, for example, as in the first embodiment.

In the following step S3010, the determination waiting time setting process is executed. The determination waiting time defines the execution timing of the remaining ball determination processing, and in the present embodiment, it is the waiting time from the end timing of the second open / close execution mode. The determination standby time is the time (about 2 sec) obtained by adding the movement time (about 2 sec) until the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 to the time until the shutter is released (3.5 sec) set in step S3009. The predetermined time is longer than 5.5 sec), and is set to, for example, 6 sec.

After the execution of step S3010, in step S3011, the determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, and then the remaining ball determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3001 that the determination standby flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3012 to determine whether or not it is the execution timing of the remaining ball determination. This process determines whether or not the determination waiting time set in step S3010 has elapsed. If it is not the execution timing of the remaining ball determination, the present remaining ball determination process is terminated, while if it is the execution timing of the remaining ball determination, the process proceeds to step S3013 to determine whether or not the first open / close execution mode is being executed. judge. By executing such a process, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the remaining ball determination and the execution period of the first opening / closing execution mode overlap.

If the first open / close execution mode is not being executed, in step S3014, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", and the remaining ball determination is performed. The remaining ball counter RPC in this case targets the period from the start of the second open / close execution mode to the execution timing. By the way, the remaining ball counter RPC is incremented by 1 each time a prize is detected in the accessory device 150 (step S2104 in FIG. 35 and step S1503 in FIG. 27), and the discharge of the game ball from the accessory device 150 is detected. Each time it is done, it is decremented by 1 (step S2303 in FIG. 37 and step S1506 in FIG. 27).

If it is determined in step S3014 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3015, assuming that the game ball remains in the accessory device 150, and the remaining ball is in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Store the flag. After the execution of step S3015 or when it is determined in step S3014 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", the determination standby flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is deleted in step S3016. .. After that, the present remaining ball determination process is terminated.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S3013, that is, when it is determined that the first open / close execution mode is in progress, the process of steps S304 and S3015 (residual ball determination) is skipped and the process of step S3016 is executed. The determination of the remaining sphere in this case is performed in step S3004. That is, when the execution timing of the remaining ball determination and the execution period of the first opening / closing execution mode overlap, the remaining ball determination is executed at the end of the first opening / closing execution mode.

Next, the normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (b). FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing normal processing. Note that FIG. 49 (b) shows only a portion different from the normal process of FIG. 19, and the process of step S3101 of FIG. 49 (b) is executed by step S606 (game state transition process) of FIG. It is done after it is done.

In step S3101, the shutter processing is executed. This process is for driving and controlling the shutter 221 under the condition that neither the first opening / closing execution mode nor the second opening / closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, when the drive timing of the shutter 221 set in step S3009 arrives, if the first open / close execution mode is not executed, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state in this process. If the first open / close execution mode is being executed when the drive timing of the shutter 221 arrives, the shutter 221 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the processing for the moving part in the accessory in step S809 of FIG. Switch.

<About the flow of games>
Next, the flow of the game according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. 50 and 51 are timing charts for explaining the flow of the game after the end of the second open / close execution mode. The former is an open standby time when 2.5 sec is selected, and the latter is an open standby time. The case where 0.5 sec is selected as the time is shown. Here, in both cases of FIGS. 50 and 51, the game balls are stored in the accessory device 150 at the end of the second opening / closing execution mode, and the common hold number is one. I will proceed with the explanation.

First, a case where an open waiting time of 2.5 sec is selected with reference to FIG. 50 will be described. When the second open / close execution mode ends at the timing t61, the hold information held in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is shifted to the execution area AE, and a hit / fail judgment is made. Will be. In this case, it is assumed that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a normal open result. After the execution of the pass / fail determination, the opening / closing accessory 168 is started to wait for opening, and the state is continued until the opening waiting time (2.5 sec) elapses.

When the opening standby time elapses at the timing t62, the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched to the open state. Further, at the timing t62, the first opening / closing execution mode is started when the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened. At the timing t63 when the opening time (0.5 sec) has elapsed from the timing t62, the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched from the open state to the closed state. After the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched to the closed state, the end of the first opening / closing execution mode is waited until the timing t66 when the end waiting time (3.5 sec) elapses. During the first open / close execution mode, when the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 192, it is activated and the V winning is generated. The elapsed time from the end timing (timing t61) of the second opening / closing execution mode to the end of the first opening / closing execution mode is 2.5 sec, which is the opening standby time, and 0, which is the opening time of the opening / closing accessory 168. It is 6.5 sec, which is the sum of 5.5 sec and 3.5 sec, which is the waiting time at the end of the first open / close execution mode.

Further, at the timing t64 when 3.5 sec has elapsed from the end of the second open / close execution mode (timing t61), the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the storage state of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is released, and the storage release ball starts moving toward the V winning sensor 192. The storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 at the timing t65 when about 2 sec has elapsed from the storage release.

In this case, the arrival timing is 5.5 seconds after the end timing of the second open / close execution mode, and 6.5 sec after the end timing of the second open / close execution mode, which is the end timing of the first open / close execution mode (timing t66). ) Before. Therefore, when the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192, the V winning is generated, and the second opening / closing execution mode is newly started.

In this way, the game balls stored in the second open / close execution mode are retained even after the end of the second open / close execution mode, and the storage is released after the lapse of a predetermined period. Therefore, the second open / close execution mode is set by the stored balls. It can be made into a continuous villa. As a result, it is possible to enhance the joy when the winning balls are stored, and it is possible to improve the interest.

When the storage release is waited after the end of the second open / close execution mode, the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, the speaker unit 64, etc. are notified of the timing of the storage release and the waiting time until the timing. It may be configured to be performed. For example, in the case of notification by the symbol display device 51, it is preferable to perform a specific display or display a standby time at the timing of release of storage. When displaying the waiting time, not only at the end of the second open / close execution mode, but also at the time when a predetermined timing is reached after the end of the second open / close execution mode, the remaining waiting time until the storage release timing is displayed. good. Further, for example, a countdown display, a level gauge, or the like may be used to suggest a change in the remaining time, or a notification suggesting the elapsed time since the end of the second opening / closing execution mode may be performed. Controls related to these notifications can be performed by the display control device 100 that controls the symbol display device 51, and the effect control device 82 that controls the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64.

Next, a case where an opening waiting time of 0.5 sec is selected with reference to FIG. 51 will be described. When the second open / close execution mode ends at the timing t71, the pass / fail determination is performed based on the hold information held in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. In this case, it is assumed that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a normal open result. After the execution of the pass / fail determination, the opening / closing accessory 168 is started to wait for opening, and the state is continued until the opening waiting time (0.5 sec) elapses. At the timing t72 when the opening standby time has elapsed, the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched to the open state, and the first opening / closing execution mode is started.

Further, at the timing t73 when 3.5 sec has elapsed from the end of the second open / close execution mode (timing t71), the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the storage state of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is released, and the storage release ball starts moving toward the V winning sensor 192. The storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 at the timing t75 about 2 sec after the storage release.

On the other hand, the first opening / closing execution mode started from the timing t72 is 4 sec (0.5 sec, which is the opening time of the opening / closing accessory 168) from the start of the mode, and the waiting time at the end of the first opening / closing execution mode. It ends at the timing t74 when the total time with 5 sec) has elapsed. Here, the end timing of the first open / close execution mode is 4.5 sec after the end timing of the second open / close execution mode, whereas the timing at which the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 is the second open / close execution. It will be 5.5 seconds from the end timing of the mode. That is, the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 after the first opening / closing execution mode is completed. In this case, even if the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192, it is not valid and the V winning is not generated. Therefore, a new second opening / closing execution mode is not started.

In this way, when the open waiting time of 0.5 sec is selected, the second open / close execution mode does not stay in a row even if the first open / close execution mode is executed. Therefore, at the end of the second open / close execution mode. Even if there is storage and there is a hold, the consecutive villas in the second open / close execution mode will not be guaranteed. As a result, even if the game ball is stored and held, it becomes impossible to take care of it, and it becomes possible to keep paying attention to the development of the game until a new second opening / closing execution mode is generated.

In addition, since the ease of consecutive villas in the second open / close execution mode differs depending on the open wait time selected, it is possible to make a strong interest in which open wait time is selected after the end of the second open / close execution mode. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

At that time, when the notification is performed based on the hold digestion or the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 (when there is no hold), the open waiting time of 2.5 sec is selected and the open waiting time of 0.5 sec is selected. It is preferable that the notification mode of the above notification is common or indistinguishable depending on whether or not is selected. In this case, it becomes difficult to estimate the opening waiting time from the notification, and it becomes difficult to predict the consecutive villas in advance. Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain the tension until the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 and the presence or absence of the consecutive villas becomes clear. The above notification may be performed by the symbol display device 51 or the display light emitting unit 63 as a display effect, or may be performed by the speaker unit 64 as a voice effect.

In the above description with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51, it is assumed that the game ball is stored in the accessory device 150 at the end of the second opening / closing execution mode, but the storage may not occur. That is, in the final round in the second open / close execution mode, the second distribution member 310 is not fixed to the distribution state side, but is in the distribution state and non-distribution according to the distribution pattern table shown in FIG. 34 (b). It is controlled by switching to the minute state. Therefore, depending on the winning timing of the game ball to the accessory device 150, the final round (second opening / closing execution mode) may end without the winning ball being distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side. With such a configuration, it is possible to arouse a feeling of tension that the second opening / closing execution mode may end in the absence of storage, and it is more interesting than the case where the second opening / closing execution mode is simply digested. It becomes possible to improve the sex.

Next, the execution timing of the remaining ball determination will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the remaining ball determination.

In the present embodiment, there are cases where (1) the first open / close execution mode is not executed when the determination waiting time has elapsed, and (2) the first open / close execution mode is executed when the determination waiting time has elapsed. , The execution timing of the remaining ball determination is different.

(1) If the first open / close execution mode is not executed when the determination wait time has elapsed, the determination wait time (6 sec) set at the end of the second open / close execution mode has elapsed as shown in FIG. 52 (a). At the timing t77, the remaining ball determination is executed. In this case, even if the first opening / closing execution mode is performed after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode and before the elapse of the determination waiting time, the game ball is ejected from the accessory device 150 in the second opening / closing execution mode. After all of the discharge of the game ball from the accessory device 150 in the first opening / closing execution mode and the discharge of the game ball stored from the accessory device 150 at the end of the second opening / closing execution mode are completed. The remaining ball determination is executed (see the flow from step S3010 in FIG. 49 to YES in step S3001). Therefore, if the game is being played normally, the number of winnings and the number of ejects match, and after the second opening / closing execution mode, the subsequent first opening / closing execution mode, and the first opening / closing execution mode are completed. It is possible to appropriately determine the remaining balls by summarizing the entry and exit of the game balls in each situation with the discharge of the storage release balls.

Note that FIG. 52 (a) illustrates a case where the first open / close execution mode is executed after the end of the second open / close execution mode, but even when the first open / close execution mode is not executed, the remaining ball determination is appropriately performed. It can be carried out. That is, since the remaining sphere determination is performed after waiting for the discharge of the storage release sphere, the remaining sphere determination can be performed after solving the situation where the number of discharged spheres is one less than that occurs at the end of the second opening / closing execution mode. can.

On the other hand, (2) when the first open / close execution mode is executed when the determination waiting time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the first open / close execution mode is not executed at the timing t77 when the determination waiting time has elapsed. The remaining ball is determined at the timing t78 when is completed. For example, in the configuration in which the remaining ball is determined at the timing t77, in the first opening / closing execution mode, when a prize is generated in the accessory device 150 immediately before the timing t77 and the winning ball is discharged after the timing t77, The remaining ball determination is executed in a state where the number of ejected balls is smaller than the number of winning balls, and there is a possibility that it is erroneously determined that the remaining balls are abnormal. In this regard, with the configuration shown in FIG. 52 (b), since the remaining ball determination is performed after the ejection of the winning game ball in the first opening / closing execution mode is completed, the above-mentioned erroneous determination can be suppressed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from each of the above embodiments in that the game ball can be stored in the accessory device 150 in the first opening / closing execution mode.

Briefly explaining the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, the winning ball is stored in the accessory device 150 in the first opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution mode based on the normal opening result), and the mode is terminated. It is configured to maintain the storage state for a predetermined period after that. Then, when a new first open / close execution mode occurs during the maintenance period of the storage state, the storage state is released and a V prize is generated by the storage release ball. In the present embodiment, for convenience, the description will proceed assuming that the upper limit of the number of common hold is 0, that is, the hold function is not provided.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an opening timing table according to the present embodiment. The release timing table is stored in the release timing table storage area 113c in the ROM 113.

In the opening timing table, the opening waiting time is defined in association with the opening type counter CS. Here, the opening standby time is the waiting time from winning the operating ports 38 and 39 to opening the opening / closing accessory 168.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the opening table according to the present embodiment, two types of opening waiting time, 0.5 sec and 2 sec, are set. The opening type counter CS "0" to "39" correspond to the opening waiting time of 0.5 sec, and the opening type counter CS "40" to "99" correspond to the opening waiting time of 2 sec. That is, the probability that the open waiting time of 0.5 sec is selected is 2/5, and the probability that the open waiting time of 2 sec is selected is 3/5, and the former probability is lower.

Next, among various control processes executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81, a portion different from the first embodiment will be described.

First, in the present embodiment, the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 when the first opening / closing execution mode is executed is different from the first embodiment. The operation mode of the second distribution member 310 in this case is set in the second distribution setting process of step S1204 in the control start process of FIG. 24.

In step S1204 in the present embodiment, the operation mode is such that the second distribution member 310 is switched to the distribution state (a mode in which the game ball is distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side) during the execution of the first opening / closing execution mode. To set. Specifically, the non-distribution state is switched to the distribution state after the period TS1'(0 sec) has elapsed from the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168, and then the non-distribution state is restored after the period TS2'(0.3 sec). Then, the non-distribution state is set to be maintained until the opening / closing accessory 168 is closed. That is, in the present embodiment, in the first opening / closing execution mode, the game ball winning the accessory device 150 can be distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side.

The operation mode of the shutter 221 during the execution of the first opening / closing execution mode is set so as to be maintained in the closed state throughout the first opening / closing execution mode, as in the first embodiment.

Next, the game control process will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 54 (a) shows only a portion different from the game control process of FIG. 21, and the process of steps S3201 and S3202 of FIG. 54 (a) is affirmatively determined in step S807 of FIG. 21, that is, , Is executed as part of the game end process.

When it is determined in step S807 that the end waiting time has elapsed, that is, when it is the end timing of the first open / close execution mode, the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S3201. Determine if it is. This process determines whether or not a V prize has occurred in the first open / close execution mode.

If the V winning flag is not stored, the shutter setting process is executed in step S3202. In this process, the waiting time B until the shutter 221 is switched to the open state after the end of the first opening / closing execution mode is set. This standby time B corresponds to a period during which the game ball stored in the accessory device 150 in the first open / close execution mode is maintained in the stored state after the end of the first open / close execution mode. The standby time B is not particularly limited, but is set to, for example, 5 sec. Further, the maintenance period after switching to the open state is set to 0.3 sec as in the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the shutter process of step S3101 is executed in the normal process (FIG. 19) as in the sixth embodiment. ing. The process of step S3101 is for driving and controlling the shutter 221 under a situation where neither the first open / close execution mode nor the second open / close execution mode is executed, and the standby time B set in step S3202 is set. After that, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state in this process.

Returning to the description of the game control process in FIG. 54 (a), if it is determined in step S3201 that the V winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3203 to perform a shutter release process for switching the shutter 221 from the closed state to the open state. Execute. By this process, when a V prize is generated in the first opening / closing execution mode, if the game ball is stored in the accessory device 150, the storage is released and the stored ball is discharged from the accessory device 150. ..

After the execution of step S3203 or step S3202, the process proceeds to step S811 to execute a process of erasing the first open / close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114.

Next, the hit / fail determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (b). FIG. 54 (b) shows only a portion different from the hit / fail determination process of FIG. 23, and the process of steps S3301 and S3302 of FIG. 54 (b) is a case where a negative determination is made in step S1104 of FIG. 23, that is, , Is executed when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a normal open result.

If it is determined in step S1104 that the result of this game is not an outlier result (if it is a normal open result), the shutter setting process is executed in step S3301. In this process, the waiting time A until the shutter 221 is switched to the open state after winning a prize in the operating ports 38 and 39 is set. This waiting time A corresponds to the closing period of the shutter 221 from the time when the operating ports 38 and 39 are won to the time when the shutter 221 is opened. The opening of the shutter 221 based on the lapse of the standby time A is for causing the storage release ball to reach the V winning sensor 192 in the first opening / closing execution mode based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39. Therefore, it is sufficient that the waiting time A is shorter than the time obtained by subtracting the "moving time of the storage release ball" from the "elapsed period from the above winning to the end of the first opening / closing execution mode", for example, 0. It is set to .5 sec. Further, the maintenance period after switching to the open state is set to 0.3 sec as in the first embodiment.

In the following step S3302, the process of clearing the waiting time B set in the above step S3202 is executed. As a result, the opening operation of the shutter 221 scheduled after the lapse of the waiting time B is disabled (cancelled). That is, in the present embodiment, if a prize is awarded to the operating ports 38 and 39 during the elapse of the waiting time B, the shutter 221 is not opened even after the elapse of the waiting time B.

In the following step S3303, it is determined whether or not the determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The determination standby flag indicates that the execution of the remaining ball determination process is awaited after the end of the first open / close execution mode. If the determination standby flag is stored, the process of clearing the determination standby flag is executed in step S3304. After the execution of step S3304, or when it is determined in step S3303 that the determination standby flag is not stored, the normal release command setting process is executed in step S1107 (FIG. 23).

Next, the remaining ball determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 55. The process of FIG. 55 is executed in place of the remaining ball determination process of FIG. 38 according to the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the processing in the second opening / closing execution mode (processing after step S2405 in FIG. 38) is the same as the first embodiment, and therefore the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

In the remaining ball determination process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If the determination standby flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3402, and it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the first open / close execution mode.

When it is the end timing of the first open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S3403 whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not the V prize has occurred in the first opening / closing execution mode. If the V winning flag is not stored and no V winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3404 to execute the determination waiting time setting process.

The determination waiting time defines the execution timing of the remaining ball determination processing, and in the present embodiment, it is the waiting time from the end timing of the first opening / closing execution mode. The determination waiting time is the moving time (about 2 sec) until the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 with respect to the waiting time B (5 sec) until the shutter is released set in step S3202 (FIG. 54 (a)). ) Is set to be a predetermined time longer than the added time, and is set to, for example, 7.5 sec. In the following step S3405, the determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, assuming that the remaining ball determination is in the standby state. After the execution of step S3405, when a negative determination is made in step S3402 (when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the first open / close execution mode), or when an affirmative determination is made in step S3403 (when it is determined that the V winning flag is stored). ) Ends the present remaining ball determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3401 that the determination waiting flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3406, and it is determined whether or not the determination waiting time set in step S3404 has elapsed. When the determination waiting time has elapsed, in step S3407, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", and the remaining ball determination is performed. The remaining ball counter RPC is incremented by 1 each time a prize is detected in the accessory device 150 (step S1503 in FIG. 27), and is decremented by 1 each time the discharge of a game ball from the accessory device 150 is detected. (Step S1506 in FIG. 27).

If it is determined in step S3407 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3408, assuming that the game ball remains in the accessory device 150, and the remaining ball is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Store the flag. After the execution of step S3408 or when it is determined in step S3407 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", the determination standby flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is deleted in step S3409. .. After that, the present remaining ball determination process is terminated.

If the normal opening result is determined at the time of winning the operating ports 38 and 39, it is determined in the previous step S3303 (FIG. 54 (b)) whether or not the determination standby flag is stored, and the determination standby flag is stored. If so, the determination standby flag is deleted in step S3304. When the determination waiting flag is cleared, a negative determination is made in step S3401 in FIG. 55, so that the remaining ball determination in steps S3407 and S3408 is not executed even after the determination waiting time has elapsed. That is, when a prize is awarded to the operating ports 38 and 39 during the determination standby (when the first opening / closing execution mode occurs), the remaining ball determination is not executed (cancelled).

<About the flow of games>
Next, the flow of the game related to the first opening / closing execution mode will be described. In the present embodiment, the flow of the game depends on the case where the waiting time B for opening the shutter elapses without the first opening / closing execution mode occurring and the case where the first opening / closing execution mode occurs before the waiting time B elapses. Is different. Here, first, the case where the first opening / closing execution mode does not occur will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. It is assumed that 2 sec is selected for the open waiting time.

When the operating ports 38 and 39 are awarded at the timing t81, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state at the timing t82 when the waiting time A (0.5 sec) has elapsed. The shutter 221 is switched to the closed state again after the open state is maintained for 0.3 sec.

At the timing t83 when the opening standby time (2 sec) has elapsed from the winning (timing t81) to the operating ports 38 and 39, the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched from the closed state to the open state. At the same time, the second distribution member 310 is switched from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. The second distribution member 310 is switched to the non-distribution state again after the distribution state is maintained for 0.3 sec.

When the game ball wins the accessory device 150 at the timing t84 immediately after the timing t83, since the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state at this point, the winning ball is distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side. Will be. At that time, since the shutter 221 is in the closed state, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 are stored in the entrance guide portion 215.

After that, when the first open / close execution mode ends at the timing t85, the standby time B (5 sec) for opening the shutter is set. Then, at the timing t86 when the waiting time B has elapsed, the shutter 221 is switched to the open state, and the storage of the game ball is released. As a result, the storage release ball starts moving toward the V winning sensor 192, and passes through the V winning sensor 192 about 2 sec later. However, since the first opening / closing execution mode is finished when the V winning sensor 192 passes, it is not treated as a V winning.

Next, the case where the first opening / closing execution mode occurs before the waiting time B elapses will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 57. Since the flow up to the timing t85 at which the first opening / closing execution mode ends is the same as in the case of FIG. 56, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the first open / close execution mode ends at the timing t85, the standby time B (5 sec) for opening the shutter is set as described above. When the operating ports 38 and 39 are awarded at the timing t86', which is the timing before the waiting time B elapses, the waiting time B is cleared. As a result, the release of the shutter 221 scheduled at the timing t90', which is the elapsed timing of the standby time B, is not executed.

At the timing t87'when the waiting time A (0.5 sec) has elapsed from the timing t86', the shutter 221 is switched to the open state, and the storage of the game ball is released. Further, at the timing t88'when the opening standby time (2 sec) has elapsed from the timing t86', the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched to the open state, and the first opening / closing execution mode is started. Here, the execution period of the first opening / closing execution mode is 4 sec (the total time of the opening time of 0.5 sec and the waiting time at the end of 3.5 sec), and the storage release ball is in the first opening / closing execution mode. After about 0.5 sec from the start, the V winning sensor 192 is passed. That is, the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 during the execution of the first opening / closing execution mode started from the timing t88', and the V winning is generated (timing t89'). As a result, the transition to the second open / close execution mode occurs.

In this way, if the first opening / closing execution mode occurs before the waiting time B elapses, the first opening / closing execution mode is executed later by the game ball stored in the accessory device 150 in the first opening / closing execution mode. It becomes possible to generate a V prize in the mode. That is, if the game balls are won in the operating ports 38 and 39 within the waiting time B, the second opening / closing execution mode is generated. Therefore, the waiting time B is shifted to the second opening / closing execution mode. It will be an easy advantageous period. As a result, it is possible to excite the game after the first opening / closing execution mode is completed, and it is possible to arouse the motivation to continue the game.

Although not shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, when the game ball wins the accessory device 150 in the first opening / closing execution mode from the timing t83, the game ball reaches the rotating body 201, and the game ball reaches the rotating body 201. A V prize may occur in the first open / close execution mode. Therefore, as the state at the end of the first opening / closing execution mode, (a) V winning could be generated, (b) V winning could not be generated, but the game ball was placed in the accessory device 150. It is possible to create three states: (c) V prizes could not be generated and could not be stored. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the pachinko machine as compared with the conventional pachinko machine, which stays in two states of whether or not a V prize has occurred.

Next, the relationship between the opening standby time and the flow of the game related to the first opening / closing execution mode will be described. First, the flow when the open waiting time of 0.5 sec is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 58 (a).

When the operating ports 38 and 39 are awarded at the timing t91, the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched from the closed state to the open state at the timing t92 when the opening standby time (0.5 sec) has elapsed. At the same time, the second distribution member 310 is switched from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. Further, since the timing t92 is also the timing at which the waiting time A (0.5 sec) for opening the shutter has elapsed since the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 occurred, the shutter 221 is released from the closed state at the timing t92. It can be switched to the state.

As described above, when the opening waiting time of 0.5 sec is selected, the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state and the period in which the shutter 221 is in the open state overlap. Then, when the game ball wins the accessory device 150 at the timing t93 during the overlapping period, the game ball is distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 side by the second distribution member 310, and then the entrance guide unit is used as it is. It passes through 215 and moves toward the V winning sensor 192. That is, the route leading to the V winning sensor 192 through the entrance guide unit 215 functions as a route for directly passing the game ball winning the accessory device 150 to the V winning sensor 192.

The game ball flowing down the route reaches the V winning sensor 192 at the timing t94, which is about 2 sec after passing through the entrance guide portion 215. That is, the V prize is generated in the first opening / closing execution mode in which the prize is given to the accessory device 150.

Next, the flow when the open waiting time of 2 sec is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 58 (b).

When the operating ports 38 and 39 are awarded at the timing t95, the opening / closing accessory 168 is switched from the closed state to the open state at the timing t96 when the opening standby time (2 sec) has elapsed. At the same time, the second distribution member 310 is switched from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. At that time, the shutter 221 is in the closed state, and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state and the period in which the shutter 221 is in the open state do not overlap. Therefore, the game ball that won the prize in the accessory device 150 at the timing t97 immediately after the timing t96 is distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by the second distribution member 310, and then comes into contact with the shutter 221 and stops. , Stored in the entrance guide 215.

As described above, depending on the opening / closing standby time, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide unit 215 may be V-winned as they are or may be stored. Of these, in the latter case, if the first opening / closing execution mode does not occur before the waiting time B elapses, the V prize will not be awarded, so that the transition to the second opening / closing execution mode is not guaranteed. Therefore, for the player, the former, which wins the V prize as it is, is more advantageous. Since there is a difference in the degree of advantage even if the distribution is to the same entrance guide unit 215, the player can be interested in the game development after the distribution, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased. It will be possible.

<7th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for storing the winning game balls in the accessory device 150 is different from each of the above-described embodiments. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62.

FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body unit 180 constituting the accessory device 150 according to the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, the accessory device 150 according to the present embodiment is not provided with the warp passage 210, the second distribution member 310, the shutter 221 and the V guide passage 260 shown in FIG. That is, all the game balls that have won the prize in the accessory device 150 are guided to the ball distribution unit 185 (see FIG. 9) and flow down the left or right guidance passage 183. The ball distribution unit 185 always guides the game ball that has reached the ball distribution unit 185 to the left guidance passage 183, as in each of the above embodiments.

The guide passage 183 on the left side is provided with the first distribution member 300, as in each of the above embodiments. As shown in FIG. 8, the first distribution member 300 has a non-distribution state that constitutes a part of the floor portion of the guide passage 183 by being driven and controlled by the first distribution drive unit 300a, and the first distribution member 300. 1 The distribution state is switched to a distribution state in which the rear end of the distribution member 300 is used as a rotation axis to rotate downward and incline downward toward the disengagement passage 191b.

When the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distribution state, the game ball distributed to the left side in the guidance passage 183 passes over the first distribution member 300 and reaches the rotating body 201. On the other hand, when the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the first distribution member 300 is inclined toward the lower outlet 182b, and the game ball passing over the first distribution member 300 is a rotating body. Without reaching 201, it is guided to the disconnection passage 191b as it is.

Returning to the description of the accessory device 150 of FIG. 59, an opening / closing member 400 for opening / closing the outlet 182b is provided on the back side of the side surface of the recess 182. The opening / closing member 400 has a substantially plate shape having a size corresponding to the outlet 182b, and is movable along the side surface of the recess 182. The opening / closing member 400 is connected to the opening / closing member drive unit 400a (electromagnetic solenoid), and the opening / closing member drive unit 400a is driven and controlled to open the outlet 182b and the outlet 182b. It switches to the closed state, which closes. The opening / closing member drive unit 400a is electrically controlled with the main control device 81, and is driven and controlled by a drive signal from the main control device 81.

When the opening / closing member drive unit 400a is not driven (not in the excited state) and the opening / closing member 400 is in the open state, the game ball distributed to the outlet guide portion 203 by the rotating body 201 is released. It becomes possible to pass through the mouth 182b and is guided to the disconnection passage 191b. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member drive unit 400a is driven (excited state) and the opening / closing member 400 is in the closed state, even if the game ball received by the outlet guide unit 203 reaches the outlet 182b. , Cannot pass through the outlet 182b. In this case, the state in which the game ball is accepted by the outlet guide unit 203 is continued, and the game ball is stored in the outlet guide unit 203.

Nine out-of-door guide units 203 are provided, and each out-of-door guide unit 203 is configured to be able to accept one game ball. Therefore, it is possible to store a total of nine game balls.

The V winning opening 182a is not provided with an opening / closing mechanism such as the opening / closing member 400 and the opening / closing member drive unit 400a. That is, the V winning opening 182a is always open so that the game ball can pass through. Therefore, the game ball distributed to the V winning opening guide unit 204 is guided to the V winning opening passage 191a through the V winning opening 182a as the rotating body 201 rotates. That is, the game ball received by the V winning opening guide unit 204 is not stored after reaching the V winning opening 182a, and is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150.

Next, among various control processes executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81, a portion different from the first embodiment will be described.

As described above, since the accessory device 150 according to the present embodiment does not include the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221, in the present embodiment, processing related to drive control thereof is unnecessary. Therefore, for example, a process of driving and controlling the second distribution member 310 using the second distribution pattern table (FIG. 34) (step S1204 of FIG. 24, etc.) and a process of driving and controlling the shutter 221 (FIG. 24). Step S1205, step S2112 in FIG. 35, etc.) are omitted, and these processes are not executed.

The setting process for each round according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (a). FIG. 60 (a) shows only a part different from the setting process for each round of FIG. 30, and the process of steps S3701 and S3702 of FIG. 60 (a) is performed after the execution of step S1804 of FIG. Will be. The setting process for each round is executed at the start of the round game (see step S1705 in FIG. 29).

After executing the corresponding round pattern setting process (opening / closing pattern setting process for each round) in step S1804, the opening / closing member 400 setting process is executed in step S3701. This process sets the operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 in each round.

Here, the process of step S3701 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 60 (b). In the process of step S3701, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "15". Since the value of the first round counter RC1 is "15" means the second round game (first round in the second open / close execution mode) (see step S1608 in FIG. 28), in step S3801, it is substantially. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the round game is the second round.

If it is determined that the value of the first round counter RC1 is "15", that is, if it is the second round game, the process proceeds to step S3802, and the closed state is closed throughout the second round game. The operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 is set so as to maintain. That is, the game balls distributed to the exit guide unit 203 in the second round game are stored in the exit guide unit 203 until the end of the second round game.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3801 that the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "15", the process proceeds to step S3803, and whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "3" or more and "14" or less. Is determined. That is, it is determined whether or not the round game to be executed is one of the third round to the 14th round.

When the value of the first round counter RC1 is "3" or more and "14" or less, in step S3804, the game is closed from the start of the round game until the predetermined period elapses, and then the predetermined opening period is reached. The operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 is set so as to be in the open state and then in the closed state until the round game is completed. Therefore, in the round games from the third round to the 14th round, the game balls distributed to the exit guide unit 203 are stored in the outlet guide unit 203 from the start of the round game until a predetermined period elapses. After that, the opening / closing member 400 is switched to the open state, so that the storage state is released. Then, the opening / closing member 400 is switched to the closed state again, and the game balls distributed to the exit guide unit 203 are stored in the outlet guide unit 203 during the remaining period of the round game.

The predetermined period for maintaining the closed state may be shorter than the execution period of the round game for one round, and is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, it is, for example, 5 sec. On the other hand, the opening period for maintaining the open state is also arbitrary, but when discharging all the game balls stored in the exit guide portion 203, the period is longer than the period during which the rotating body 201 makes one round. There is a need. In the present embodiment, when the opening / closing member 400 is switched to the open state, the rotation speed of the rotating body 201 is increased so as to make one revolution in 1 sec, and then the open period is set to 1.5 sec.

If it is determined in step S3803 that the value of the first round counter RC1 is "3" or more and not "14" or less, the process proceeds to step S3805 and whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "2". That is, it is determined whether or not the round game to be executed is the 15th round (the round game immediately before the final round).

When the value of the first round counter RC1 is "2", in step S3806, the game is closed from the start of the round game until a predetermined period elapses, and then is opened for a predetermined opening period. After that, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 is set so that the open state is maintained until the end of the round game. Therefore, in the 15th round round game, the game balls distributed to the out-of-door guide unit 203 are stored in the out-of-door guide unit 203 from the start of the round game until a predetermined period elapses. By switching the opening / closing member 400 to the open state, the storage state is released. After that, since the state in which the storage is released continues until the end of the round game, the game balls are not stored even if the game balls are distributed to the exit guide unit 203. The predetermined period in this step is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, it has the same length as the predetermined period in step S3804.

When it is determined in step S3806 that the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "2", it means that the round game to be executed is the 16th round (final round) round game. In this case, in step S3807, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 is set so as to maintain the open state throughout the round game of the 16th round. That is, the game ball distributed to the exit guide portion 203 in the 16th round game is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 as the rotating body 201 rotates. After each process of steps S3802, S3804, S3806, and S3807 is executed, the setting process of the opening / closing member 400 is completed.

Returning to the description of the setting process for each round in FIG. 60 (a), after executing the process of step S3701, the setting process for the rotating body is executed in step S3702. As described above, the present embodiment has a configuration in which the rotating body 201 is rotated at high speed in accordance with the switching of the opening / closing member 400 to the open state, and this step performs the setting process. In this embodiment, since the rotating body setting process is performed for each round, step S1609 (rotating body setting process) in the game state transition process of FIG. 28 is not executed.

In step S3702, whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "2" or more and "14" or less (whether or not the round game to be executed is one of the 23rd to 15th rounds). If a positive determination is made, the mode of operation of the rotating body 201 is such that high-speed rotation is performed over a high-speed rotation period (1 sec) after a predetermined period (the same period as the above-mentioned predetermined period in step S3804) has elapsed. To set.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made by the above determination, that is, when the round game to be executed is the second round or the 16th round, the normal rotation speed (one lap in 5 sec) is maintained throughout the round game. The operation mode of the rotating body 201 is set to 1. After the execution of step S3702, step S1805 (process for setting the upper limit number of winnings to the accessory device 150) of FIG. 30 is executed.

Next, the round update process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b). FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b) show only a portion different from the round update process of FIG. 36. The process of step S3901 of FIG. 61 (a) is performed after the execution of step S2206 of FIG. 36, and the process of step S3902 of FIG. 61 (b) is performed after the execution of step S2209 of FIG. 36. In the round update process, when the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit winning number (9) in the round game, or the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened reaches the upper limit (19 times). This is the case (see step S1712 in FIG. 29).

First, the closing setting process of the opening / closing member 400 in step S3901 of FIG. 61A will be described. This process sets the operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 during the closing period (round interval) between each round. In step S3901, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 is set so that the opening / closing member 400 is in the closed state throughout the closing period. Therefore, if the game ball is stored in the exit guide unit 203 at the end of the immediately preceding round, the stored state is maintained even after the transition to the closing period, and that state is taken over to the next round as it is. After the execution of step S3901, the process proceeds to step S2207 (setting process of the round update command) in FIG.

Next, the opening setting process of the opening / closing member 400 in step S3902 of FIG. 61B will be described. This process sets the operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 during the ending period. In step S3902, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 400 is set so that the opening / closing member 400 is in the open state throughout the ending period. Therefore, even if the game balls are stored in the exit guide unit 203 at the end of the immediately preceding round, those stored balls are discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 during the ending period. After the execution of step S3902, the process proceeds to step S2210 (ending command setting process) of FIG.

Next, the processing for the moving portion in the accessory according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61 (c). FIG. 61 (c) shows only a portion different from the process for the in-feature moving portion of FIG. 26, and the process of steps S4101 and S4102 of FIG. 61 (c) is described in steps S1403 to S1406 of FIG. It is executed instead. It should be noted that the processing for the motion unit in the accessory is executed in step S1615 of the game state transition processing of FIG. 28.

In the process for the moving part in the accessory, when a negative determination is made in step S1401 (determination process of determining whether or not the control timing is the first distribution member 300), or step S1402 (drive control process of the first distribution member 300). After executing, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing (control timing) of the opening / closing member 400. If it is the displacement timing, the open / close control process is executed in step S4102. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the opening / closing member drive unit 400a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the opening / closing member driving unit 400a is grasped, and if the driving state is in the driving state, the driving is terminated to displace the opening / closing member 400 from the closed state to the open state. Further, when the opening / closing member driving unit 400a is not in the driving state, the driving is started to displace the opening / closing member 400 from the open state to the closed state. If a negative determination is made in step S4101, or after the execution of step S4102, the process proceeds to step S1407 (rotating body control process).

<About the flow of games>
Next, the flow of the game according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second opening / closing execution mode. Here, the third and fourth round games will be described as an example. In addition, it is assumed that the execution mode of the second opening / closing execution mode is the continuous fluctuation mode, and that the V prize is generated at any timing of the third round and the fourth round is executed.

At the timing t102, which is 5 seconds after the timing t101 when the third round game is started, the opening / closing member 400 is switched from the closed state to the open state, and the outlet 182b is opened. This state is maintained until the timing t103 after 1.5 sec. Further, as already described, between the timings t102 and t103, the rotating body 201 rotates at high speed so as to make one revolution in 1 sec.

Therefore, the game ball stored in the outlet guide portion 203 at the time of the timing t102 is guided to the outlet 182b until the timing t103, and is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150. As a result, as shown in FIG. 62A, the state of the rotating body 201 at the timing t103 is a state in which the game ball is not accepted by all nine outlet guide portions 203, that is, any of the outlet guide portions 203. It is in a state where it is possible to accept a game ball.

Then, at the timing t103, the opening / closing member 400 is switched from the open state to the closed state, and the outlet 182b is closed. As a result, in the rotating body 201, it becomes possible to store the game balls distributed to the outlet guide portion 203. Such a state continues until the timing t106, which is 5 sec after the start of the fourth round. Therefore, if the game ball is stored in the exit guide portion 203 at the timing t104 when the third round ends, it is taken over at the timing t105 when the fourth round starts.

At the timing t104, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), when the game balls are stored in the four outlet guide portions 203, these outlet guide portions 203 are in a state of being blocked by the reservoir balls. Therefore, it becomes impossible to accept new game balls. Therefore, at the timing t105 when the fourth round is started, the total number of ball guide units 202 that can accept game balls is six including the V winning opening guide unit 204. As a result, the V winning rate (probability that the game ball that has reached the rotating body 201 is distributed to the V winning opening guide portion 204) at the start of the fourth round is 1/6.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), for example, most of the game balls winning in the accessory device 150 are distributed to the outlet 182b by the first distribution member 300, and the outlet for storing the game balls is stored. If the number of guide units 203 remains at one, the total number of ball guide units 202 that can accept game balls is nine at the timing t105 when the fourth round is started. In this case, the V winning rate is 1/9, and the V winning rate is lower than in the case of FIG. 62 (b).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of advantage at the start of the fourth round changes depending on the number of game balls distributed to the exit guide portion 203 after the timing t103 of the third round. Therefore, the period A from the timing t103 to t104 is a period for increasing the number of the exit guide portions 203 in which the game balls are stored in order to start the fourth round advantageously.

The period B from the timing t105 when the fourth round is started to the timing t106 when the opening / closing member 400 is switched to the open state is a period for aiming for a V prize while benefiting from the storage accumulated in the period A. Even in the period B, if the game ball is distributed to the vacant exit guide unit 203, the game ball is stored in the guide unit 203. As a result, the total number of ball guide units 202 that can accept game balls is further reduced, and the proportion of the V winning opening guide unit 204 is higher. Therefore, in the period B, the closer to the timing t106 at the end of the period, the higher the V winning rate and the more likely the V winning is to occur.

If the V prize is too simplified, the significance of providing the continuous fluctuation mode is lost, and the attractiveness of the V prize is reduced. Therefore, it may be desirable that V winning is difficult to some extent. As a countermeasure, for example, the number of the exit guide portions 203 may be increased in the rotating body 201, or the game ball may be accepted by one outlet guide portion 203. It is possible to increase the number. However, in these cases, the structure of the rotating body 201 and the exit guide portion 203 may become complicated, which may increase the burden of designing the accessory. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the number of game balls toward the rotating body 201 is reduced by the first distribution member 300, the number of the exit guide portions 203 and the game to one outlet guide portion 203 are played. The number of balls accepted can be kept small. This makes it possible to maintain a certain degree of difficulty in winning a V while simplifying the configuration of the rotating body 201 and the exit guide portion 203.

When the opening / closing member 400 is switched to the open state at the timing t106, that state is maintained for 1.5 sec. As a result, the storage of the game balls is released, and the state of the rotating body 201 is such that the game balls are not accepted by all the nine outlet guide portions 203, as shown in FIG. 62 (a).

At that time, the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, the speaker unit 64, or the like may be configured to give a notification suggesting the timing of release of storage and the period until the timing. For example, in the case of notification by the symbol display device 51, it is preferable to perform a specific display at the timing of release of storage, or to display the above period at the start of the round, the round interval immediately before the round, or the predetermined timing after the start of the round. Further, for example, a countdown display, a level gauge, or the like may be used to suggest a change in the remaining time, or a notification suggesting the elapsed time from the start of the round may be given. Controls related to these notifications can be performed by the display control device 100 that controls the symbol display device 51, and the effect control device 82 that controls the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64.

At the timing t107 when 1.5 sec has elapsed from the timing t106, the opening / closing member 400 is switched to the closed state, and that state is maintained until the timing t108 when the fourth round ends. Therefore, the timings t107 to t108 are the period A for increasing the number of the exit guide portions 203 in which the game balls are stored in order to make the fifth round advantageous, as in the case of the timings t103 to t104.

After that, the fifth round game is performed in the same manner as in the case of the fourth round, and thereafter, the first half of the round game becomes the period B to benefit from the previous round, and the second half is stored for the next round. The round game, which is the period A for increasing the number of players, is repeated until the 14th round.

Incidentally, if the V prize does not occur in the period B of the timing t105 to t106, the V prize must be aimed at in the period A of the timing t107 to t108. As described above, at the timing t107, the storage up to that point is reset, so that the V winning rate in the period A is assumed to be lower than that in the period B. That is, by setting the storage release timing in the middle of the round game, it is possible to switch from the state in which the V winning is easy to the state in which the V winning is difficult in the round game. In this way, since the period in which the V prize was given preferential treatment was limited to the middle of the round game, the round game can be advanced under the tension that the preferential period may end without the V prize occurring. The fun is improved.

By the way, in order to satisfy the continuation condition in the round game, it is sufficient for the game ball to pass the V winning sensor 192 once, and it is not necessary to pass the ball repeatedly. Further, unlike the out-of-door guide unit 203, the V winning opening guide unit 204 does not store game balls. Therefore, even if the game ball is distributed to the V prize opening guide unit 204 again after the V prize is generated, the player has no reward other than receiving the payout of the game ball. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the exit guide unit 203 after the V prize is generated, there is a merit that not only the game ball is paid out but also storage occurs and the next round game becomes advantageous.

That is, in the present embodiment, the V winning opening guide section 204 is more advantageous than the exit guide section 203 before the occurrence of the V winning, whereas the V winning opening guiding section 204 is more advantageous than the V winning opening guiding section 204 after the occurrence of the V winning. However, the outlet guide unit 203 is advantageous. That is, the advantageous relationship is reversed with the occurrence of the V prize as a boundary, and it is possible to provide a novel playability that has never existed in the past. Further, in this configuration, two games, a game aiming at distribution to the V winning opening guide unit 204 and a game aiming at distribution to the out-of-door guide unit 203, can be realized in one round game. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the pachinko machine as compared with the conventional pachinko machine whose former is only guaranteed.

Next, the flow of the second round game will be described. In the second open / close execution mode, the second round game, which is the first round, cannot start the round game in an advantageous state because there is no carry-over (storage) of the game ball from the previous round game. Therefore, in the second round, unlike the third to the fourteenth rounds, the opening / closing member 400 is not switched to the open state during the round game, and the storage is not released. Therefore, in the second round game, the game ball can be stored in the exit guide unit 203 by using the entire round game. As a result, the V winning rate in the second round is increased, and the second opening / closing execution mode is suppressed from ending early. Since the game balls stored in the second round are taken over as they are in the third round, the game can be advanced particularly advantageously in the period B of the third round.

Next, the flow of the 15th round and the 16th round round game will be described. As described above, in the fifteenth round, the opening / closing member 400 is switched to the open state during the round game, but is not returned to the closed state after that, and the open state is maintained until the end of the round. Therefore, in the 15th round, after the first half period B is completed, the game balls are not stored thereafter. Further, in the 16th round, since the opening / closing member 400 is maintained in the open state throughout the round game, no accumulation occurs throughout the round game.

This is because the upper limit round in the second open / close execution mode is set to 16 rounds, so even if a V prize occurs in the 16th round, the next round is not carried out, and the latter half of the 15th round and the 16th round. This is because there is little significance in storing game balls. Further, if it remains in the accessory device 150 even after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode, it is difficult to secure the timing of the remaining ball determination, but with the above configuration, the timing of the remaining ball determination is secured. It will be easier to do.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the remaining ball determination is performed at the end of the ending, as in the first embodiment. In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 400 is opened during the ending period. As a result, not only when the round game reaches the 16th round, but also when it ends in the middle round (for example, the 5th round), at the end of the ending (when the remaining ball determination is executed), the accessory device. It is possible to set the state in which all the game balls in 150 are discharged, and it is possible to appropriately determine the remaining balls.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the accessory device 150, the game balls distributed to the exit guide unit 203 can be stored, and the stored balls increase the V winning rate of the next round game. As a result, it becomes possible to play games in cooperation with the previous and subsequent round games, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which the games are independent for each round game.

Further, by utilizing the outlet guide unit 203 as a storage unit, the following effects can be expected. Normally, when the game ball is distributed to the receiving unit for disconnection, the player feels disappointed, but in the present embodiment, the player is advantageous when the game ball is distributed to the outlet guide unit 203. Therefore, the outlet guide unit 203 is recognized as a useful receiving unit. As a result, it is possible to realize a game playability that the player is pleased with regardless of whether the game ball is distributed to either the V winning opening guide unit 204 or the out-of-door guidance unit 203, and it is possible to suitably increase the motivation for playing. In addition, since the exit guide unit 203, which has been conventionally recognized only as a disadvantage, functions as a receiving unit that enhances the degree of advantage, it is possible to give unexpectedness and give a fresh impression to the player. become.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the rotating body 201, the first distribution member 300, and the second distribution member 310 are provided as various distribution means, but the configuration for distributing the game ball is arbitrary. Further, the present invention is not limited to the dynamic distribution structure, and may be a static distribution structure such as a distribution passage or a crune.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the game balls stored in the entrance guide portion 215 or the exit guide portion 203 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, but may not be visible. In this case, it is not clear from the player's point of view whether or not there is storage, and it is possible to add fun in guessing this.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 in one specific game (round game, first opening / closing execution mode, second opening / closing execution mode) wins a V in the next specific game. It is configured to pass through the sensor 192, but is not limited to this. For example, the game ball may pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the specific games one after another when viewed from the specific game in which the game ball has won a prize in the accessory device 150. In short, the winning ball in the previous specific game may pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the specific game executed after that.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the number of balls entered into the accessory device 150 and the number of balls discharged from the accessory device 150 are managed by one counter (remaining ball counter RPC), but the number of balls entered. A first counter for grasping the number of balls and a second counter for grasping the number of discharged balls may be provided, and the number of balls entered and the number of discharged balls may be managed separately. In this case, the remaining sphere determination can be performed based on determining whether or not the values of the first counter and the second counter match.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, a waiting time at the end is provided in each round game in the second opening / closing execution mode, but a game in which the waiting time at the end is not provided or the waiting time at the end is won by the accessory device 150. It may be shorter than the time until the ball is ejected from the accessory device 150. With these configurations, it is possible to carry over the game balls other than the game balls stored in the entrance guide unit 215 or the exit guide unit 203 to the next round. However, even if the final winning ball in the round game (the game ball won just before the accessory device 150 is closed) passes through the V winning sensor 192, the passage will be after the end of the round game, and the V winning will be invalidated. Considering that a situation may occur, it is preferable to use the configuration of the above embodiment.

Further, in the configuration in which the waiting time at the end is provided, the waiting time at the end may be set only when the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit winning number. According to this configuration, for example, when the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened reaches the upper limit opening number (provided that the upper limit winning number is not reached at the same time), the round game is promptly ended. It is possible to shorten the waiting time until the next round game.

Further, in the configuration in which the waiting time at the end is provided, whether or not the V winning is generated (or whether or not the continuation condition is satisfied) when the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit winning number. If the V prize has already been generated, the waiting time at the end may not be provided (the waiting time at the end is set to 0 sec). This is because it is not meaningful to wait for whether or not the final winning ball passes V when the V winning has already occurred.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, when a V prize is generated in the first open / close execution mode, the first open / close execution mode may be terminated based on the occurrence of the V prize. As a result, the second open / close execution mode can be started without waiting for the elapse of the waiting time at the end, and the smooth progress of the game can be promoted. In this case, it is advisable to perform the remaining ball determination after a predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the first opening / closing execution mode. At that time, by setting the predetermined period to a period shorter than the opening period of the second opening / closing execution mode, the remaining ball determination can be completed during the execution of the opening, and the interference with the remaining ball determination with respect to the second opening / closing execution mode can be achieved. Can be suppressed. Further, the configuration may be such that the remaining ball determination is not performed for the first opening / closing execution mode in which the V prize is generated, and the configuration is performed collectively with the second opening / closing execution mode.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39, the design is variably displayed on at least one of the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 51, in other words, the lottery process is performed. The variation display may be started based on the performance, and the game round may be executed in which the stop result corresponding to the result of the lottery process is displayed and the variation display is terminated once. In this case, after starting the variable display based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39, the variable display may be performed for the same period as the opening standby time, and then the pattern may be stopped and displayed. The display mode (stop display result) of the pattern in the case of stop display may correspond to the result of the lottery process (see FIG. 12) performed based on the winning of the operating openings 38 and 39.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, it is premised that the hold information is acquired based on the winning of each of the operating ports 38 and 39, and the hold information is stored up to a predetermined number (4 each). As described above, the hold information may not be stored. By doing so, the configuration can be simplified.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, as an example, a configuration in which up to 4 pieces of hold information are stored based on winning a prize in each of the operating ports 38 and 39 has been described as an example, but less than 3 pieces are used. There may be five or more, or the upper limit number of stored information based on the winning of each of the operating ports 38 and 39 may be different.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the number of reserved information is displayed by the reserved light emitting units 54 to 56, but it may be configured to be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Where the symbol display device 51 is configured to be provided on the upper part of the bonus device 150, the player can operate the game ball centering on the bonus device 150, such as winning a prize in the bonus device 150 and then winning a V prize. It is considered that the person is highly interested in the aspect, and if the number of reserved information is displayed in a place close to the place of such interest (that is, the display screen G), it naturally comes into view. it is conceivable that. By doing so, it is possible to centralize information and make the game easier to understand, as compared with a configuration in which different notifications are performed using various points. However, in each of the above embodiments, when the mode is changed to the open / close execution mode, the type of the open / close execution mode is notified on the display screen G. When notifying the type, the display of the information on the number of reserved pieces is deleted, or the type of the open / close execution mode is notified while leaving the information on the number of held pieces. In the former case, there may be an inconvenience that even if the number of pending information is confirmed, it cannot be performed when the notification of the type of open / close execution mode is performed, and in the latter case, the effect area becomes small. Therefore, there is a possibility that the notification of the type of opening / closing execution mode itself may be sober. Therefore, for example, if the display screen G is configured to display the number of hold information even though the hold light emitting units 54 to 56 are provided, even if the display of the number of hold information is deleted on the display screen G, at that time. May be confirmed by the reserved light emitting units 54 to 56, and various information can be suitably displayed according to the timing.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, as the hold information, the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired at the time of winning the operating ports 38 and 39, and the type (big hit type) of the opening / closing execution mode is determined using the jackpot type counter C2. Although it is configured to be determined, it may be configured to acquire a counter for determining the type of opening / closing execution mode at the time of winning V and determine the type of opening / closing execution mode based on the counter. By doing so, it is possible to omit the process of acquiring the counter used at the time of V winning at the time of winning the operating ports 38 and 39 even though the V winning has not occurred, and the processing configuration is simplified. Can be achieved. However, for example, when determining the opening / closing pattern, the configuration reflects the type of opening / closing execution mode at the time of V winning. When the V winning rate is increased / decreased, it is preferable that the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of the open / close execution mode is acquired as the hold information. In addition, a configuration that notifies the type of open / close execution mode when a V prize is won at the time of execution of open / close control or at the time of open / close control corresponding to the hold information in the look-ahead notification (for example, "16R big hit if hit here !!" Also in the display, etc.), it is preferable that the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of the open / close execution mode is acquired as the hold information.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the support mode by the electric accessory 39a is set so as not to be different, but a plurality of types of support modes may be set so that the support mode is different. Specifically, for example, as a support mode, the electric accessory 39a of the second operating port 39 is opened per unit period when compared in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. The low-frequency support mode (or low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of the states is relatively high or low.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 39a is in the open state when the electric accessory open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one opening period is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric accessory 39a is won in the open state and the electric accessory 39a is opened multiple times, it is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The period is set shorter than one opening period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, as compared with the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured period for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be performed after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (that is, that is). The duration of one display on the accessory display unit 44) is set short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 39 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the probability that the accessory device 150 will be in the open state is high, and the probability of winning a V (occurrence of a big hit) is also high.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit period is not limited to the above, for example, the electric motor open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening period is lengthened, and the securing period secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened. By applying any one of the conditions of shortening the average period of the securing period and increasing the winning probability, or any combination of conditions, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced. ..

In the case of the configuration in which the height of the support state by the electric accessory 39a is not provided as in each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration may be such that the electric accessory 39a and the through gate 41 itself are not provided. By doing so, the configuration can be simplified.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, based on the occurrence of the V prize for the accessory device 150, the process shifts to the second opening / closing execution mode, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the prize for the accessory device is generated. Although the configuration is easy to use, the second open / close execution mode may be executed by another winning device. For example, a variable ball entry device capable of displacing a game ball flowing down the game area into an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter is provided separately from the accessory device 150. Based on the occurrence of V winning in the accessory device, the main control device 81 controls the variable ball entry device to be in the open state.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side by the second distribution member 310 is always V-winning, but a part of the game ball is awarded to the off-side. May be good.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the gaming ball that has won the bonus device 150 is discharged to the outside of the bonus device by the V winning passage 191a or the exit passage 191b, and the discharged game ball is discharged (not shown). Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the passage, it may be configured to be discharged to the game area as the outside of the accessory device.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, when the power is restored without operating the RAM erasing switch 98a from the game stop state based on the abnormality detection, the abnormality detection state and the game stop state are canceled, but those states are canceled. It may be configured not to. In this case, a release switch for canceling the abnormality detection state and the game stop state is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and when the power is restored while the staff of the game hall operates the release switch, the main control device 81 It is preferable that the configuration is such that the abnormality detection state and the game stop state are released. As a result, when the power is restored by operating only the power switch 92b, the game stop state can be continued even after the power is restored.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the prize ball is paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the prize sensor 192, but the game ball is detected by the V prize sensor 192 and the detachment sensor 193. The prize ball may be paid out based on this. However, considering the time lag from the occurrence of winning the prize to the accessory device 150 until the prize ball is paid out, it is preferable to use the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, the accessory device 150 includes the opening / closing accessory 168, but may be configured so that the ball can enter without the opening / closing accessory 168. The accessory device in this case is, for example, "a specific area provided in the game area where the game ball can enter" or "a specific area provided in the game area and partitioned so that the game ball can enter". And so on.

(19) Each of the above embodiments can be applied to the following configurations. For example, a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a lottery based on winning a prize in any of the operating ports 38 or 39 causes a transition to an opening / closing execution mode (so-called jackpot game) (big hit result)). Based on the above, the low probability mode in which the probability of a lottery result causing the transition to the open / close execution mode is a predetermined probability as the lottery mode of the lottery process, which causes the transition to the open / close execution mode, and the above. In a gaming machine equipped with a high probability mode in which the lottery result is higher than the low probability mode, the gaming ball passes through the V winning opening 182a when the variable entry device is opened during the open / close execution mode (V). By winning a prize), the gaming state after the end of the open / close execution mode may shift to the high probability mode (so-called V probability change machine). Further, the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above embodiments corresponds to a so-called type 2 pachinko machine, but the configuration of each embodiment is applied to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixed type gaming machine. You may.

(20) In the first to sixth embodiments, the warp passage 210 is arranged behind the rotating body 201, but may be arranged sideways or in front of the rotating body 201. However, if it is arranged laterally, the width dimension of the accessory device 150 tends to be large, which leads to narrowing the flow area of the game ball outside the accessory device. Considering this point, it is preferable to arrange the space in the front or rear to utilize the space in the front-rear direction. However, if it is arranged in the front, the visibility of the rotating body 201, which is of great interest to the player, is hindered. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange it in the rear as in the above embodiment. In this case, it does not necessarily have to be directly behind, but may be diagonally behind.

(21) In the first to sixth embodiments, the warp passage 210 is provided to guide the game ball stored in the accessory device 150 to the V winning sensor 192 without passing through the rotating body 201. However, the game ball stored in the accessory device 150 may be guided to the rotating body 201. In this case, the rotating body 201 is stopped at a predetermined position where the storage release ball can be distributed to the V winning opening guide unit 204 (for example, the position where the V winning opening guide unit 204 faces the lead-out unit 186) in accordance with the timing of storage release. If the configuration is such that the ball is released from storage, the V winning rate of the ball can be stabilized.

However, since it is necessary to control the movement of the rotating body 201 in consideration of both the game ball heading toward the rotating body 201 without being stored and the game ball heading toward the rotating body 201 through storage, the control becomes complicated. The processing load of the main controller 81 may increase. Further, considering that the game ball heading for the rotating body 201 without being stored and the game ball heading for the rotating body 201 through the storage may interfere with each other, and one of them may hinder the V winning of the other, each game ball. However, it is preferable that the route to the V winning sensor 192 is independent. Based on these, it is preferable to use the above embodiment.

Further, when the game ball stored in the accessory device 150 is guided to the rotating body 201, the rotating body 201 may be rotated as usual. In this case, it is possible to avoid an increase in processing load due to the complexity of operation control. However, the number of game balls heading toward the rotating body 201 is only increased by the amount of storage, and it does not mean that it is remarkably easy to win a V prize. As a result, the attractiveness of storage is reduced and the desire to store is reduced. From this point of view, it is preferable to use the above embodiment.

(22) In the first to sixth embodiments, the game balls are stored in a stopped state, but the game balls may be stored while being moved. For example, it is possible to provide a circulation path for circulating the game ball that has entered the bonus device 150 without discharging it from the bonus device 150, and to store the game ball by moving the game ball in the circulation path. In this case, a derivation unit capable of deriving the game ball moving in the circulation path to the V winning sensor 192, and a distribution means for distributing the game ball in the circulation path to the out-licensing section side and the side in which the circulation path is continuously moved. , Should be provided. By controlling the distribution timing (the timing of distribution to the out-licensing unit side) of the distribution means, the storage can be released at an appropriate timing.

(23) In the first to sixth embodiments described above, the period from when the storage of the storage sphere is released until the storage release sphere reaches the V winning sensor 192 is configured to be a fixed period (about 2 sec). However, it may be configured to diversify the above period (a configuration in which the passing timing of the V winning sensor 192 is different even if the storage release timing is the same).

For example, as the above period, a first period and a second period longer than the first period are at least generated, and in the first period, the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 in the next round game, and the second period. In the period, the V winning sensor 192 can be passed after the end of the next round game. When the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 after the end of the next round game, it may be configured to pass through the V winning sensor 192 at the round interval between the next round game and the V winning sensor 192 in the next round game. It may be configured to pass through the winning sensor 192. In the former case, the V prize is not generated by the storage release ball, and in the latter case, the implementation of the next round is confirmed one after another. In the case of the first period, the storage release ball may pass through the V winning sensor 192 before the start of the next round game, and may pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the next round game in the second period. .. In these cases, since the subsequent game development by the storage release ball is randomized, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball whose storage is released.

As a configuration for diversifying the period until the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192, it is preferable to provide a period variable means such as a crune between the storage unit and the V winning sensor 192. Further, instead of the crune, a plurality of ball passages having different passage lengths up to the V winning sensor 192 and a distribution means for distributing the released game balls to the plurality of ball passages may be provided.

(24) In the first to sixth embodiments described above, the game balls are stored in the accessory device 150, but the storage is not necessarily accompanied. For example, by providing a moving path that takes a long time to reach the V winning sensor 192 and moving within the moving path, a game ball that has won a prize in the accessory device 150 in the previous specific game (round game, etc.) It may be configured to pass through the V winning sensor 192 in a later specific game.

(25) In the first to sixth embodiments, one game ball can be stored, but a plurality of game balls may be stored.

(26) In the first embodiment described above, the storage is released at the end of the round game, but the storage may be released before the end. Further, the storage may be released after the next round game is started, or the storage may be released during the closing time (round interval) between each round. In short, it is sufficient if the game ball won in the previous round game can pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the later round game, and the timing of releasing the storage is arbitrary. However, if the storage is released after the next round game is started, the player not only releases the storage, but also determines whether the game ball wins the accessory device 150 or whether the winning ball wins V. You need to be careful and you will be in a hurry. For this reason, it is easy to overlook the storage release, and based on this point, it is preferable to release the storage at the round interval at the end or end of the round game where the game settles down.

(27) In the first embodiment, the second distribution member 310 is maintained in the non-distribution state in the first opening / closing execution mode, and the game ball is not guided to the entrance guide portion 215 (warp passage 210) side. However, the second distribution member 310 may be switched between a distribution state and a non-distribution state and driven so that the game ball can be distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side. In this case, if the shutter 221 is further opened, the game ball passes through the entrance guide portion 215, and the warp passage 210 can be utilized as a direct V route.

(28) In the first embodiment, the configuration may be such that the storage availability of the game ball during the round game differs depending on the type of jackpot. For example, a jackpot A and a jackpot B can be provided, and in the case of the jackpot A, it is possible to store the game ball during the round game, and in the case of the jackpot B, it is impossible. Further, depending on the type of jackpot, the rounds in which the game balls can be stored and the number of rounds may be different.

(29) In the second embodiment described above, the second distribution member 310 is maintained in the non-distribution state in the fifth, tenth, and 16th rounds so that the winning balls are not stored. However, the second distribution member 310 may be configured to switch between the distribution state and the non-distribution state while driving, while maintaining the shutter 221 in the open state. In this case, the game ball distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 by the second distribution member 310 passes through the V winning sensor 192 via the warp passage 210 without being stored in the entrance guide portion 215. .. That is, the distributed game ball is not carried over to the next round game, and passes through the V winning sensor 192 in the round game in which the prize is generated.

(30) In the second embodiment, the round (15th round) immediately before the upper limit round (16th round) cannot be stored in place of or in addition to the 5th round, the 10th round, and the 16th round. The round may be such that the remaining ball is determined in response to the end of the previous round. Even if the game ball wins a V in the upper limit round, the next round is not executed, and there is little merit in storing the game ball in the previous round. It becomes possible to execute the remaining ball determination in the middle of the jackpot without damaging it.

(31) In the third embodiment, the execution timing of the remaining ball determination is set based on the elapsed time from the start of the round game, but it may be set based on the elapsed time from the release timing of the storage. .. In this case, if the period from the release of the storage to the execution of the remaining ball determination is made longer than the period until the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192, the storage release ball is released from the accessory device 150. The remaining ball determination can be executed after being discharged.

(32) The following configuration may be used instead of the third embodiment. In the third embodiment described above, it is possible to determine the remaining ball for each round, but since the winning of the accessory device 150 is limited by the short opening mode, it is difficult for the player to win the winning impression. May be given. Therefore, first, the configuration is such that the short opening mode is not executed. Then, the second retention means capable of retaining the game ball entering the accessory device 150 in the accessory device 150 and the second retention release means for releasing the retention are provided with the entrance guide unit 215 and the entrance guide unit 215. A configuration is provided separately from the shutter 221 to start the round game in a state where the game ball can be retained in the second retention means, and release the retention after a predetermined period has elapsed. Further, the entrance sensor 179 is provided on the downstream side of the second retention means, and the game balls retained by the second retention means are not counted as winnings (not detected by the entrance sensor 179). In this case, if the configuration is such that "passing of the V winning sensor 192 of the storage release ball and determination of the remaining ball (the determination of the remaining ball is after the V winning of the storage release ball)" is performed within the above predetermined period, the accessory device 150 is reached. The remaining ball counter RPC is updated based on the winning of the game ball of No. 1 after the execution of the remaining ball determination. That is, it is possible to allow the player to win a prize in the accessory device 150 while avoiding interference with the remaining ball determination, and it makes the player feel that it is difficult to win a prize while enabling the remaining ball determination for each round. Can be suppressed.

In the above configuration, the second retention means may be provided on the upstream side of the inlet guide portion 215 and the shutter 221 or on the downstream side. Further, the short opening mode may be executed in the above configuration. In this case, there is an effect that the disagreement between the number of prizes and the number of emissions when a prize is generated in the short opening mode can be suppressed.

(33) In the fourth embodiment, the storage is released based on the number of winnings in the accessory device 150 being a specific number (8), but based on the elapsed time from the start of the round game. It may be configured to be released. In this case, it is possible to deal with the case where the prize is not easily generated in the accessory device 150 and the round game is completed while the number of prizes is less than the above-mentioned specific number. In the fourth embodiment, the specific number is 8 (one less than the maximum number of prizes), but the specific number is arbitrary. For example, the maximum number of prizes may be a specific number. ..

(34) In the fourth embodiment, the special storage release is performed only in the second round game, but it may be performed in a round game other than the second round. In this case, it may be performed in all rounds, or it may be performed in some rounds. In the latter case, after determining the round to be executed for the special storage release in advance, it is determined whether or not the round game is the above-mentioned predetermined round when the second open / close execution mode is executed, and the result is affirmed. It is preferable to control the operation of the shutter 221 so as to perform a special storage release when the determination is made. This gives preferential treatment to some rounds. In this case, different notifications may be given depending on whether the round with such preferential treatment is executed and the round without such preferential treatment is executed, or only the former may be configured as a specific notification. These notifications may be performed by the symbol display device 51 or the display light emitting unit 63 as a display effect, or may be performed by the speaker unit 64 as a voice effect.

(35) In the fifth embodiment, when the specific round is executed, the game ball can be stored for a predetermined period after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode, and the specific round is not executed. In addition, the game ball may not be stored after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a privilege when the round game is continued until a specific round, it is possible to provide a chance of consecutive villas in the second opening / closing execution mode. As a result, a game goal of continuing until a specific round in the second opening / closing execution mode is added, and the fun of the second opening / closing execution mode can be enhanced. The specific round is not particularly limited, but is preferably less than the upper limit round (16 rounds) (for example, 10 rounds). In this case, the player can set the game goal step by step, such as continuing to at least a specific round, preferably continuing to the upper limit round.

Further, when the specific round is executed, it becomes impossible to store the game ball after the end of the second open / close execution mode, and when the specific round is not executed, a predetermined period after the end of the second open / close execution mode. The game ball may be configured to be able to be stored over the same period. In this case, as a relief when the second opening / closing execution mode ends in a small number of rounds, it is possible to provide a chance of consecutive villas in the second opening / closing execution mode. The specific round in this case is also arbitrary, but in order to suppress the intentional end in the middle round, for example, about 4 rounds are preferable.

It should be noted that switching between storage availability can be performed, for example, by controlling the operation mode of the shutter 221 during the ending period. Specifically, when storage is possible, the shutter 221 may be closed during the ending period, and when storage is not possible, the shutter 221 may be open during the ending period.

(36) In the fifth embodiment, the possibility of storing the game ball after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode may differ depending on the type of jackpot. For example, a jackpot A and a jackpot B can be provided, and in the case of the jackpot A, the above-mentioned storage is possible, and in the case of the jackpot B, the above-mentioned storage is impossible.

In this case, different notifications may be performed depending on whether the jackpot A is executed and the jackpot B is executed, or only the former may be configured as a specific notification. These notifications may be performed by the symbol display device 51 or the display light emitting unit 63 as a display effect, or may be performed by the speaker unit 64 as a voice effect. When the jackpot type is sorted, for example, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the pachinko machine 10 determines which jackpot type will be used when a prize is awarded to the operating ports 38 or 39 or when the pachinko machine is on hold. It becomes possible to grasp. In this case, the notification is not limited to the second opening / closing execution mode, and may be configured to be performed in the first opening / closing execution mode or its opening standby time.

(37) In the fifth embodiment, when there is a hold at a specific timing in the second open / close execution mode, the hold information and the release wait time corresponding to the hold information are pre-read (37). The pending information and the corresponding release waiting time are specified at the timing before the pending information is subject to lottery processing such as winning / failing), and notification is given based on the pre-reading result. good. For example, when the opening waiting time of 2.5 sec, which is expected to be a continuous villa, is pre-read, a special notification (for example, "a big hit" is made at a predetermined timing which is one of the timings until the end of the second open / close execution mode. If there is a stock of balls at the end of the game, there is a chance of a consecutive villa! ”, Etc.).

In this case, before the end of the second open / close execution mode, the player can grasp that it is advantageous to have storage at the end and that there is a high possibility of a consecutive villa, so that the player can know that there is storage. 2 The motivation to end the open / close execution mode is increased. As a result, the importance of the final round can be increased, and the second open / close execution mode can be enjoyed until the end. In addition, since the look-ahead is performed by having the hold information, it is possible to increase the motivation to cause the hold.

In addition, when the opening waiting time of 0.5 sec, which is unlikely to be a continuous villa, is pre-read, a notification different from the above special notification may be performed, or a configuration in which no notification may be particularly performed may be performed. Further, the look-ahead of the hold information may be performed by the main control device 81 or by a control device other than the main control device 81 (effect control device 82 or the like).

(38) In the fifth embodiment, the period from the end of the second opening / closing execution mode to the release of storage is standardized, but one period is selected from a plurality of periods having different lengths. By doing so, the period until the storage is released may be diversified. For example, it is preferable to execute the lottery process using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and determine the above period based on the result. When the period until the storage is released is diversified, it becomes difficult to predict whether the second opening / closing execution mode will be in a row, so that the tension until the storage is actually released increases and the interest is improved. In addition, by randomizing the release timing of the storage, it is possible to suppress the act of aiming for a prize in the actuation ports 38 and 39 according to the release timing (when there is no hold information at the end of the second open / close execution mode). ), It becomes easier to guarantee the fairness of the game.

In the above configuration, a predetermined notification suggesting a period until the storage is released may be performed at a specific timing (for example, at the end of the second opening / closing execution mode). In this case, since the release timing of the storage can be predicted, it is possible to increase the motivation to generate the first opening / closing execution mode accordingly. At this time, a countdown display or the like may be performed based on the remaining time until the storage is released. Further, the configuration may be such that the predetermined notification is not performed. In this case, since it is difficult to predict the timing of releasing the storage, it is expected that the stored balls will continue to be watched until the storage is released, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Further, in the above configuration, if there is hold information at the end of the second open / close execution mode, notification is performed based on the relationship between the release waiting time corresponding to the hold information and the selected storage release period. May be. For example, in the relationship between the two, when the second open / close execution mode is in a row or is likely to be in a row (when the storage release ball can pass through or easily pass through the V winning sensor 192 during the first open / close execution mode). It is advisable to give a special notification (for example, "If you can stock the ball at the end of the big hit game, you have a big chance!"). If the second open / close execution mode does not stay in a row or if there is a high possibility that the storage release ball cannot pass through the V winning sensor 192 or is difficult to pass through in the first open / close execution mode, the above special notification is given. May give different notifications, or may be configured not to give particular notifications.

Further, when there is a hold at a specific timing in the second open / close execution mode, the hold information and the release waiting time corresponding to the hold information are pre-read, and the pre-reading result and the selected storage release are performed. The notification may be performed based on the relationship with the period. For example, in the relationship between the two, when the second open / close execution mode is in a row or is likely to be in a row, the above is performed at a predetermined timing which is any timing from the pre-reading to the end of the previous second open / close execution mode. It can be configured to perform special notification.

(39) In the sixth embodiment, the hold information is not stored even if a prize is won in the actuation ports 38, 39 during the opening standby time or the first open / close execution mode, but the hold information is stored. It may be configured to be. Then, as in the fifth embodiment, the shutter 221 is switched to the open state when a predetermined predetermined period elapses after the end of the first opening / closing execution mode (for example, the standby time A is set. It may be eliminated and only the waiting time B). In this case, for example, 4 sec is further provided as the opening standby time, and in the case of 2 sec, the stored ball can pass through the V winning sensor 192 during the later first open / close execution mode, and in the case of 4 sec, the later first open / close execution mode. The predetermined period is set so that the stored ball cannot pass through the V winning sensor 192.

Then, when there is a hold at a specific timing, which is any timing from the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 to the end of the first opening / closing execution mode, the hold information and the hold information are supported. It is preferable to pre-read the opening standby time and perform notification based on the result. For example, when the open waiting time of 2 sec is pre-read, a special notification (for example, "If the ball can be stocked, it is large" at a predetermined timing which is any timing from the pre-reading to the end of the first open / close execution mode. Chance! ”Etc.) In this case, since the player can grasp that it is advantageous to have the storage in the first opening / closing execution mode, the motivation to generate the storage is increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased. It will be possible. In addition, since the look-ahead is performed by having the hold information, it is possible to increase the motivation to cause the hold. When the open waiting time of 4 sec is pre-read, the notification different from the above special notification may be performed, or the notification may not be particularly performed.

(40) In the sixth embodiment, the waiting time B may be diversified. Thereby, the length of the advantageous period starting after the end of the first opening / closing execution mode can be diversified, and the degree of advantage can be different. In that case, a predetermined notification suggesting a standby time B (a period until the storage is released) may be performed at a specific timing (for example, at the end of the first opening / closing execution mode). In this case, since the release timing of the storage can be predicted, it is possible to increase the motivation to generate the first opening / closing execution mode accordingly. At this time, a countdown display or the like may be performed based on the remaining time until the storage is released. Further, the configuration may be such that the predetermined notification is not performed. In this case, since it is difficult to predict the timing of releasing the storage, it is expected that the stored balls will continue to be watched until the storage is released, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

(41) In the seventh embodiment, the winning ball to the accessory device 150 is distributed to the outlet guide unit 203, and the game ball is stored in the outlet guide unit 203, which is advantageous. However, it is not limited to this. For example, what is a specific receiving unit (a receiving unit different from the exit guide unit 203 and the V winning port guide unit 204) or a specific passing unit (exit sensor 193 and V winning sensor 192) provided in the accessory device 150? By distributing the winning balls to different passing portions), the exit guide portion 203 is closed (the winning balls cannot be accepted), or the exit guide portion 203 changes to the V winning opening guide portion 204. The number of winning opening guides 204 may be increased. In addition, as a configuration in which the exit guide unit 203 changes to the V prize opening guide unit 204, the first aspect of guiding the game ball accepted by the exit guide unit 203 to the exit sensor 193 and guiding the game ball to the V prize sensor 192. A configuration is conceivable in which a derivation means capable of switching to the second aspect and a switching means for switching the mode of the derivation means from the first aspect to the second aspect are provided.

(42) In the seventh embodiment, the storage is released based on the lapse of the period, but the storage may be released according to the number of winnings to the accessory device 150. In this case, the storage can be released based on the number of winnings being a predetermined number. For example, when a prize is not easily generated in the accessory device 150, it is possible to store the game ball in the exit guide unit 203 without sufficiently obtaining an opportunity to distribute the game to the outlet guide unit 203 (. The favorable condition) may end. In this respect, according to the above configuration, since the above state continues until the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to appropriately secure an opportunity to distribute to the exit guide unit 203.

Further, the storage may be released based on the occurrence of the V prize. In this case, the earlier the V prize is awarded, the longer the period (period A) for increasing the number of stored balls for the next round, and the more advantageous the game can be advanced. For example, after the start of the next round game (period B), if a V prize is generated, the storage can be immediately released.

(43) In the seventh embodiment described above, when the storage is released, the entire storage is released (all the storage balls are discharged), but the storage is partially released (a part of the storage balls is discharged). It may be configured. Further, in the second open / close execution mode, a round game in which the storage is completely released and a round game in which the storage is partially released may occur.

(44) In the seventh embodiment, as in the second embodiment, a round game in which storage is not possible may occur in the middle of the second opening / closing execution mode. In this case, the remaining ball determination can be executed correspondingly at the end of the round game in which storage is not possible, as in the second embodiment.

(45) In the seventh embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, a configuration in which storage can occur at the end of the second open / close execution mode (storage occurs in the final round and it is in the ending period). The configuration may be such that the V winning rate in the subsequent first opening / closing execution mode is increased by the storage ball. In this case, the storage may be continued from the end of the second open / close execution mode until a predetermined period elapses, as in the fifth embodiment, or the first open / close after the end of the second open / close execution mode. It may be configured to continue until the number of executions of the execution mode reaches a predetermined number of times. In the former case, the advantageous period (the period in which the V winning rate increases) can be specified by the time, and in the latter case, it can be specified by the number of times of the first opening / closing execution mode. In the latter case, when the predetermined number of times is set to a plurality of times, the number of stored items may be increased. For example, if the predetermined number of times is set to 3 and the game balls distributed to the exit guide unit 203 are stored in the first opening / closing execution mode of the first and second times, the storage can be added. The V winning rate in the third opening / closing execution mode can be further increased.

(46) In the seventh embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, a configuration in which storage can occur in the first opening / closing execution mode (distributed to the outlet guide unit 203 in the first opening / closing execution mode). The game ball may be stored in the opening guide portion 203). As a result, the winning ball is distributed to the exit guide unit 203 in the first opening / closing execution mode, so that the playability in which the V winning rate in the later first opening / closing execution mode is high can be realized. In this case, the storage generated in the first opening / closing execution mode has elapsed a predetermined period from the end of the first opening / closing execution mode, or the next first opening / closing execution mode, as in the sixth embodiment. It can be canceled based on the occurrence of the open / close execution mode. Further, the configuration of (39) and (40) may be used.

(47) In the seventh embodiment, instead of or in addition to the first distribution member 300, the rotating body 201 may be provided with an outlet guide portion 203 that cannot store the game ball. In this case, there is an outlet guide unit 203 that can store the game ball and an outlet guide unit 203 that cannot store the game ball, and even if the deviation is the same, a difference in the degree of advantage can be provided. As a result, it is possible to add the fun of expecting the former to be distributed to the exit guide unit 203.

(48) In the seventh embodiment, the storage is released for each round, but the storage may be maintained for a plurality of rounds (for example, 5 rounds). In this case, as the round game is advanced, the number of the exit guide portions 203 that can accept the game ball decreases, and it is possible to realize the game property in which the V prize becomes higher. However, in order to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous, it is preferable to increase the number of the exit guide portions 203 (for example, about 50).

(49) In the seventh embodiment, one game ball can be stored for each outlet guide unit 203, but a plurality of game balls may be stored.

(50) In the seventh embodiment, when the game ball is distributed to the out-of-door guide unit 203, the probability of distribution to the V-winning opening guide unit 204 in the later round increases, so that the V-winning occurs. Later, it is more advantageous for the player to be distributed to the exit guide unit 203 than to be distributed to the V winning opening guide unit 204, but as another example, the following configuration may be used.

First, the prize ball is paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the V prize sensor 192 and the disengagement sensor 193, instead of the detection of the prize ball by the prize sensor 192. Then, as shown in FIG. 63, the downstream side of the V winning passage 191a is branched in a bifurcated manner, the V winning sensor 192 is arranged in the first passage 410, which is one of the branch paths, and the other branch path. The game ball detection sensor is not arranged in the second passage 411. Further, at the branch point of both passages 410 and 411, a distribution member 412 for distributing the game ball flowing through the V winning passage 191a into the first passage 410 and the second passage 411 is arranged. The distribution member 412 is driven and controlled by a drive unit (not shown), and the drive unit is controlled by a control signal from the main control device 81. On the other hand, the disengagement passage 191b is not provided with a branch passage or a distribution member, and all the game balls that have passed through the disengagement port 182b are guided to the disengagement sensor 193.

In the above configuration, before the V prize is generated in one round game, the game ball passing through the V prize opening 182a is distributed to the first passage 410 side by the distribution member 412, and after the V prize is generated, the above game. The distribution mode of the distribution member 412 is switched so that the sphere is distributed to the second passage 411 side by the distribution member 412. As a result, if the game ball is distributed to the V prize opening guide portion 204 before the occurrence of the V prize, the prize ball (15 pieces) is paid out when the game ball passes through the V prize sensor 192, but the V prize is won. If the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening guide unit 204 after the occurrence of the above, the game ball is ejected without passing through the V winning sensor 192, and the prize ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the exit guide unit 203 after the V prize is generated, the prize balls (15 pieces) are paid out by passing the game balls through the disconnection sensor 193. That is, when looking at the presence or absence of a prize ball, there is no difference between the V winning opening guide unit 204 and the out-of-door guidance unit 203 before the occurrence of the V-winning, but after the occurrence of the V-winning, the distribution is made to the out-of-door guidance unit 203. The prize ball is obtained only in the case where the prize ball is obtained, and the exit guide unit 203 is more advantageous to the player than the V prize entrance guide unit 204.

In addition, for the purpose of grasping the number of the game balls discharged from the accessory device 150, a discharge detection sensor for detecting the passage of the game balls may be provided in the second passage 411. In this case, the prize ball may not be paid out even if the game ball is detected by the sensor, or the number of prize balls is smaller than the number of prize balls when the game ball is detected by the detachment sensor 193 (for example). 3) may be paid out. In other words, if there is a difference in the degree of advantage depending on the prize ball, it is not always necessary to make one of them without a prize ball.

Further, instead of the configuration shown in FIG. 63, the number of prize balls may be changed before and after the occurrence of the V prize. Specifically, the prize balls are paid out based on the detection of the game balls by the V prize sensor 192 and the disengagement sensor 193, and before the occurrence of the V prize, a predetermined number is passed through the V prize sensor 192. While (for example, 15) prize balls and a smaller number (for example, 10) of prize balls than the above-mentioned predetermined number can be obtained by passing through the disengagement sensor 193, the size of the number of prize balls is reversed after the V prize is generated. However, a large number of prize balls (for example, 15 pieces) may be obtained by passing the V winning sensor 192, and a small number of prize balls (for example, 10 pieces) may be obtained by passing through the disengagement sensor 193. As another example, before the occurrence of the V prize, the same number of prize balls (for example, 10) can be obtained regardless of whether the V prize sensor 192 or the disengagement sensor 193 is passed, while after the V prize is generated, the same number of prize balls can be obtained. , The number of prize balls when passing through the disconnection sensor 193 is larger than before the occurrence of V prize (for example, 15), and the number of prize balls when passing through the V prize sensor 192 is smaller than before the occurrence of V prize. It may be configured to be (for example, 0). Even with these configurations, it is possible to realize a configuration in which it is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the out-of-door guide unit 203 than to distribute the game ball to the V-winning opening guide unit 204 after the occurrence of the V-winning.

Incidentally, the game balls distributed to the outlet guide unit 203 in the above-mentioned different examples may or may not be stored as in the seventh embodiment. Further, the above-mentioned different examples can be applied to a configuration in which a game ball can enter the accessory device without the opening / closing accessory 168 as described in (18) above.

(51) The configurations described in the first to seventh embodiments and the other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. For example, the warp passage 210 in the first embodiment may be applied. And the configuration of the second distribution member 310 and the configuration of the opening / closing member 400 in the seventh embodiment may be applied in combination. Further, for the first to seventh embodiments, or for a configuration in which a part or all of the first to seventh embodiments are combined with each other, each of the other embodiments. Part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination with each other.

(52) A pachinko machine of another type different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. As a result, the present invention is also a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as paying out a medal when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window after the reel is stopped. Can be applied.

Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable / closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

The following feature group describes the background technology that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with a variable ball entry device is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." It is desired to devise a method to increase the degree of attention to the above. "

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means.
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means (controlling process and opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect is performed. Function to execute) and
Predetermined conditions (in the case of a round game, the second open / close execution mode is started or the continuation condition is satisfied, and in the case of the first open / close execution mode, the normal opening result is based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39. (Become a big hit in the case of the second opening / closing execution mode), the specific game (round game, first opening / closing execution mode, second opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once is executed. Specific game execution means (function to execute game control processing and game state transition processing by the main control device 81) and
A passing portion (V winning sensor 192) through which a game ball entered into the variable entry means can pass, and
Equipped with
When the game ball passes through the passing portion in the specific game, it is more advantageous for the player than when it does not pass (when passing in the round game in the continuous fluctuation mode, the next round game is executed, the first round game is executed. If it passes in the open / close execution mode, the second open / close execution mode is executed).
When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game that is executed first among the plurality of times the specific game is the first. The second distribution by the specific means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210, main control device 81) that enables the passage through the passage portion in the second specific game executed after the specific game. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of controlling the operation mode of the member 310 and the shutter 221).

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once, in which the variable ball entry means is the first aspect, is executed, and the game in which the ball is entered into the variable ball entry means is executed. When the ball passes through the passing portion, it is in an advantageous state for the player. Therefore, the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through the passing portion. Normally, the game ball can pass through the passing portion, which is an advantageous opening, only in the specific game in which the ball enters the variable ball entry means. In this case, as the specific game ends, the expectation that the specific game will be in an advantageous state may disappear.

In this respect, in this configuration, when the specific game is executed a plurality of times, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the first specific game is the second specific game after that. It is configured so that it can pass through the passing part. In this case, if the game ball is inserted into the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, the chance that the game ball will be in an advantageous state even after the end of the first specific game continues. Therefore, as compared with the conventional gaming machine in which the above-mentioned chance ends when the first specific game ends, it is possible to enhance the sustainability and interest of the expectation.

In the above feature A1, "when the game ball passes through the passing portion in the specific game, the passage portion (V winning sensor 192) through which the game ball entered into the variable ball entering means can pass" is provided. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player than the case of not passing (the next round game is executed when passing in the round game of continuous fluctuation mode, and the second opening / closing execution mode is executed when passing in the first opening / closing execution mode. "It is a configuration (executed)" is different from the first passing portion (V winning sensor 192) and the first passing portion as a passing portion through which the game ball entered into the variable entry means can pass. A distribution means (rotating body 201) having a second passing portion (disengagement sensor 193) and capable of distributing a game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means into the first passing portion and the second passing portion. ), And when the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is distributed to the first passage portion by the distribution means, it is more advantageous for the player than the case where the game ball is distributed to the second passage portion. (If it passes in the round game in the continuous fluctuation mode, the next round game is executed, and if it passes in the first open / close execution mode, the second open / close execution mode is executed). " good.

Feature A2. Means for allowing a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the second specific game to pass through the passing portion in the second specific game (second distribution member 310, guide passage 183, rotation). The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized by having a body 201).

According to the above configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game after that, and the second specific game later. There may be a case where the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the game can pass through the passing portion as it is in the second specific game. Therefore, when acquiring an advantageous state in the second specific game, there is a chance that both the game ball entered in the first specific game and the game ball entered in the second specific game have an advantageous state. .. As a result, it is possible to expand opportunities to acquire advantageous conditions and improve the interest.

Feature A3. The specific means is
At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is discharged from the variable ball entry means in a predetermined region (entrance guide section 215) that is upstream of the passing portion. Retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) that can be retained without any problem, and
A retention release means (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) for releasing the retention so that the game ball in the predetermined region can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game.
The gaming machine according to the feature A1 or A2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature A1 or A2.

According to the above configuration, the game ball can be moved toward the passing portion by retaining the game ball in the variable ball entry means and releasing the retention. In this case, the timing at which the game ball passes through the passing portion can be controlled by the release timing of the retention, and the passing portion can be passed at a timing that does not depend on the timing of entering the variable ball entering means. For example, if the structure is such that the game ball is easily carried over to the second specific game when the ball enters at a specific timing such as the final stage of the first specific game, there is a possibility that the aiming may be rampant. If such an act is suppressed, it becomes possible to guarantee the fairness of the game.

Feature A4. A distribution means (second distribution member 310) capable of distributing a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to the retention means side and a side different from the retention means side.
The distribution means is divided into a first distribution mode (distribution state) in which the game ball can be distributed to the retention means side and a second distribution mode (non-distribution state) in which the game ball can be distributed to the different side. Distribution control means (function to switch and control the second distribution member 310 by the main control device 81) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein the distribution control means includes means for switching the distribution means to the first distribution mode after the retention is released by the retention release means.

According to the above configuration, after the retention of the game ball is released, distribution to the retention means side is permitted. In this case, the game ball can be guided to the retention means side after a vacancy is secured in the predetermined area where the game ball is retained. As a result, even though the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can be directed toward the retention means side, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the retention is hindered by the game ball that has already accumulated. become.

Feature A5. The retention release means does not release the retention under the situation where the variable ball entry means is the first aspect, and releases the retention under the situation where the variable entry means is the second aspect. The gaming machine according to feature A3 or A4, characterized in that it is provided with means for performing.

In the first aspect, in which the game ball can or easily enters the variable ball entry means, the player's consciousness tends to concentrate on whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. Therefore, if the stagnation is released under the situation described in the first aspect, the player may miss the release of the stagnation. In this respect, in this configuration, since the stagnation is released under the situation where the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter into the variable ball entry means, it is possible to suppress the oversight of the release of the stagnation.

Feature A6. A distribution means (second distribution member 310) capable of distributing a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game to the retention means side and a side different from the retention means side. Prepare,
The game ball distributed to the retention means side by the distribution means can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game, while the game ball distributed to the different side by the distribution means is described. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A5, characterized in that it is configured to be able to pass through the passing portion in the first specific game.

According to the above configuration, a game in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is carried over to the second specific game after that, and the game ball is transferred to the passing portion in the first specific game. You can build a game to pass through. As a result, the playability of the specific game is diversified, and it is possible to provide a novel playability that has never existed in the past. Further, by interposing the distribution by the distribution means, it is possible to clarify the division of the game playability and suppress the confusion of the players.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the game balls distributed to the retention means side by the distribution means are easier to pass through the passing portion than the game balls distributed to the different sides. ..

According to the above configuration, it is possible to arouse the expectation that the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means will be distributed to the retention means side. Further, when the retention occurs, the player can easily have a special impression, and the significance of providing the retention means can be enhanced as a whole.

In addition, this feature is described as "the probability that the game ball distributed to the retention means side by the distribution means passes through the passing portion is higher than the probability that the game ball distributed to the different side passes through the passing portion. It's getting expensive. "

Feature A8. It is characterized in that the probability that a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball-entry means is distributed to the retention means side by the distribution means is lower than the probability that the game ball is distributed to the different side by the distribution means. Feature The gaming machine described in A7.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessive advantage for the player while enhancing the significance of providing the retention means.

Feature A9. The first distribution means as the distribution means and
A second distribution means (rotating body 201) capable of distributing a game ball distributed to different sides by the first distribution means to a plurality of passage portions including a specific passage portion as the passage portion is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A6 to A8.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide an opportunity to pass through the passing portion after adding fun to the movement of the game balls distributed to different sides by the first distribution means. This makes it possible to enjoy the game even when the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means cannot be distributed to the retention means side.

Feature A10. The first distribution means and the second distribution means are visible from the front of the gaming machine, and the visibility of the first distribution means is lower than the visibility of the second distribution means. The gaming machine according to feature A9, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, the visibility of the first distribution means is made lower than that of the second distribution means, so that the first distribution means is aimed at the distribution timing to the retention means side. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, with respect to the second distribution means, it is possible to make it easier to see how the game balls are distributed, to increase the interest in the second distribution means, and to improve the presence.

Feature A11. The feature A9 or A10 is characterized in that the gaming ball whose retention is released by the retention release means is configured to be able to pass through the specific passing portion without passing through the second distribution means. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it is not necessary to consider the retention release ball in the operation design of the second distribution means, and the control of the second distribution means can be simplified. Further, since the retention release ball does not pass through the second distribution means, it is possible to prevent the retention release ball and the game ball distributed to different sides from interfering with each other in the second distribution means. .. As a result, when a situation occurs in which one of the game balls is likely to be distributed to the specific passing portion, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as being hindered by the other game ball.

Feature A12. The first release means as the retention release means and
A second releasing means for releasing the stagnation so that the game ball in the predetermined area can pass through the passing portion in the first specific game.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A3 to A11.

According to the above configuration, there may be a case where the retention release ball passes through the passing portion in the first specific game. As a result, the player's interest in the release timing can be increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Feature A13. After the start of the specific game, a predetermined end condition (the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 is the upper limit, or the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened is the upper limit) is satisfied. The specific game ending means (a function of executing the opening process by the main control device 81) for ending the specific game is provided.
The specific game end means is characterized in that even if the game ball passes through the passing portion before the end condition is satisfied in the specific game, the specific game can be continued until the end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A12.

For example, in the configuration in which the specific game ends when the game ball passes through the passing portion, in the second specific game, the carry-over ball from the first specific game passes before the ball enters the variable ball entry means. When passing through the section, the second specific game ends without entering the ball, and there may be an inconvenience that the second specific game cannot be sufficiently played. In this respect, according to this configuration, even if the game ball passes through the passing portion before the end condition is satisfied, the specific game is continued until the end condition is satisfied, so that the above-mentioned inconvenience is avoided and the second It becomes possible to appropriately secure the game period of a specific game.

Feature A14. It is provided with a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) to shift to a special game state (second open / close execution mode) capable of executing the specific game (round game) a plurality of times. ,
The special game state is configured so that the next specific game can be executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing portion in one specific game.
The specific means enables a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball-entry means in the first specific game to pass through the passing portion in the second specific game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A13.

In the above configuration, there is a special game state in which a plurality of specific games can be executed, and in the special game state, the next specific game can be performed by the game ball passing through the passing portion in one specific game. It will be possible. That is, it is a condition for carrying out the next specific game that the game ball is passed through the passing portion. Under such a premise, in this configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the first specific game executed earlier can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game executed after that. Will be. When the game ball passes through the passing portion in the second specific game, the specific game to be executed after the second specific game (referred to as the third specific game for convenience) is the third specific game. The game is a specific game after the next specific game when viewed from the first specific game. That is, according to this configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game has an influence on the execution of the next and subsequent specific games, and can provide a novel playability. It will be possible.

Feature A15. The specific means is
At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is discharged from the variable ball entry means in a predetermined region (entrance guide section 215) that is upstream of the passing portion. Retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) that can be retained without any problem, and
A retention release means (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) for releasing the retention so that the game ball in the predetermined region can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game.
Equipped with
The retention release means is the predetermined area when the game ball has not yet passed through the passing portion at the specific timing of the first specific game (the timing when the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 becomes eight). The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized in that the gaming ball in the above is provided with a means for releasing the stagnation so that the gaming ball can pass through the passing portion in the first specific game.

Under the configuration in which passing the game ball through the passing portion is a condition for carrying out the next specific game, even if the game ball can be retained in the first specific game, the game ball passes through the passing portion. If this is not the case, the next specific game will not be performed and the stagnation will be nullified. In this case, the player's disappointment is great, and there is a risk of diminishing the player's willingness to play. In this respect, in this configuration, when the passing portion is not passed at the specific timing of the first specific game, the staying ball is utilized to pass the passing portion in the first specific game. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the next specific game is not performed while the game ball is stagnant. Further, since such relief is limited to the case where there is a stagnant ball, it can be expected to have an effect of increasing the motivation to cause the stagnant ball.

Feature A16. The predetermined condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry portions (operating openings 38, 39) provided in the game area.
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing portion in the specific game (first open / close execution mode), the configuration shifts to a special game state (second open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A15, which is characterized by being

A specific game is executed based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and if the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the specific game passes through the passing portion, the player It shifts to a special game state that is advantageous for. Under such a premise, in this configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the first specific game executed earlier can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game after that. .. In this case, if a game ball is inserted into the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, there is a chance that the game ball will acquire the specific game state even after the end of the first specific game. For this reason, the interest is improved as compared with the conventional gaming machine in which the above chance ends when the first specific game ends.

Feature A17. It is equipped with a lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (winning of operating ports 38 and 39).
The predetermined condition is that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific result (big hit result).
The gaming state includes a first gaming state (low probability mode) and a second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the lottery result of the lottery means is more likely to be the specific result than the first gaming state. ,
Features A1 to A16 comprising means for shifting the gaming state after the end of the specific game to the second gaming state based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion in the specific game. The gaming machine described in any of.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the passing portion in the specific game, the lottery result shifts to the second game state in which the specific result is likely to be obtained. Under such a premise, in this configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the first specific game executed earlier can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game after that. .. In this case, if a game ball is inserted into the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, there is a chance that the game ball shifts to the second game state even after the end of the first specific game. For this reason, the interest is improved as compared with the conventional gaming machine in which the above chance ends when the first specific game ends.

Feature A18. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means.
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means (controlling process and opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect is performed. Function to execute) and
Predetermined conditions (in the case of a round game, the second open / close execution mode is started or the continuation condition is satisfied, and in the case of the first open / close execution mode, the normal opening result is based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39. (Become a big hit in the case of the second opening / closing execution mode), the specific game (round game, first opening / closing execution mode, second opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once is executed. Specific game execution means (function to execute game control processing and game state transition processing by the main control device 81) and
When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the first specific game of the plurality of specific games is later than the first specific game. The specific means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221 and warp passage 210, the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) to be discharged from the variable ball entry means in the second specific game of the above. Function to control the operation mode) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as that of the above feature A1 can be obtained. Further, each configuration described in any of the above features A1 to A17 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the above features A1 to A18, any one of features B1 to B15, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F16, and features G1 to G9 is used. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the above individually, or it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means (controlling process and opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect is performed. Function to execute) and
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means.
Predetermined conditions (in the case of a round game, the second open / close execution mode is started or the continuation condition is satisfied, and in the case of the first open / close execution mode, the normal opening result is based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39. (Become a big hit in the case of the second opening / closing execution mode), the specific game (round game, first opening / closing execution mode, second opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once is executed. Specific game execution means (function to execute game control processing and game state transition processing by the main control device 81) and
A first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the variable entry means, and
A second detection means (V winning sensor 192, a sensor for disconnection 193) capable of detecting the ejection of a game ball from the variable ball entry means, and
Specific processing execution means (by the main control device 81) that executes specific processing for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means. Function to execute the remaining ball determination process) and
Equipped with
When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, the specific process executing means does not perform each separate specific process for each specific game, and one specific process is performed for a plurality of specific games. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute processing.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game is executed in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once, in which the variable ball entry means is the first aspect, and the game ball is inserted into the variable ball entry means. When the ball is played, the player is given a privilege. In this case, a specific process for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means is executed based on the detection results of the first and second detection means. As a result, the entry and exit of the game ball to the variable ball entry means is monitored, and the act of illegally obtaining a privilege is suppressed.

Normally, the specific process for specifying the remaining state is performed for each specific game, but in this case, it is required that the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls match at the end of the specific game. Therefore, all the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game must be discharged in the specific game, and the degree of freedom in the game design is limited. In this respect, according to this configuration, since one specific process is executed for a plurality of specific games, it is sufficient that the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls correspond to each other in the plurality of specific games. As a result, the specific game can be ended with the game ball remaining in the variable ball entry means, and the degree of freedom in the game design can be increased. Further, since the execution frequency of the specific process can be reduced, the processing load of the specific process can be reduced.

Feature B2. A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for shifting to a special game state (second open / close execution mode) capable of executing the specific game (round game) a plurality of times, and
A passing portion (V winning sensor 192) through which a game ball entered into the variable entry means can pass, and
Equipped with
The special game state is configured so that the next specific game can be executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing portion in one specific game.
The specific process executing means can execute one specific process for a plurality of times of the specific game without performing each different specific process for each specific game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to feature B1, which is characterized in that it is said to be.

In the above configuration, there is a special game state in which a plurality of specific games can be executed, and in the special game state, the next specific game can be performed by the game ball passing through the passing portion in one specific game. It will be possible. That is, it is a condition for carrying out the next specific game that the game ball is passed through the passing portion. Under such a premise, in this configuration, it is possible to execute one specific process for a plurality of specific games in a special game state. In this case, a game ball that has entered the variable entry means in one specific game is carried over to the next and subsequent specific games and passes through the passing portion, thereby realizing a novel game property in which the execution of the specific game is determined. be able to.

Feature B3. The specific process executing means does not execute the specific process for each specific game in the special game state, but executes the specific process in response to the end of the final round of the specific game (main control device). The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a residual ball determination process according to 81).

According to the above configuration, since one specific process is collectively executed for the special gaming state, the execution frequency of the specific process can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, since the specific processing is executed in units of the special game state, it is not necessary to switch such as allowing the carry-over of the game ball in a specific game and restricting the carry-over in another specific game. The process can be simplified.

Feature B4. Of the specific games executed in the special game state, at least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed earlier is discharged from the variable ball entry means. Means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221 and warp passage) that are carried over to the second specific game executed after the first specific game and can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game. 210) The gaming machine according to feature B2 or B3, which comprises the feature B2 or B3.

According to the above configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the first specific game executed earlier can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game executed after that. When the game ball passes through the passing portion in the second specific game, the specific game to be executed after the second specific game (referred to as the third specific game for convenience) is the third specific game. The game is a specific game after the next specific game when viewed from the first specific game. That is, according to this configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game affects the execution of the next and subsequent specific games, and can provide a novel playability. It will be possible.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature B3, in order to execute one specific process collectively for the special game state, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is carried over to the later specific game. However, it is expected to have the effect of making it possible to appropriately determine the residual ball abnormality.

Feature B5. Of the specific games executed in the special game state, at least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed earlier is discharged from the variable ball entry means. Means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221 and warp passage) that are carried over to the second specific game executed after the first specific game and can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game. With 210)
In the first specific game, the carry-over is permitted, while in the second specific game, the carry-over is restricted.
The specific process executing means does not perform the specific process corresponding to the end of the first specific game, while the means for executing the specific process in response to the end of the second specific game (residual by the main control device 81). The gaming machine according to feature B2, which is characterized by having a function of executing a ball determination process).

According to the above configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the first specific game executed earlier can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game executed after that. When the game ball passes through the passing portion in the second specific game, the specific game to be executed after the second specific game (referred to as the third specific game for convenience) is the third specific game. The game is a specific game after the next specific game when viewed from the first specific game. That is, according to this configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game affects the execution of the next and subsequent specific games, and can provide a novel playability. It will be possible.

Further, in this configuration, by restricting the carry-over in the second specific game, the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls to the variable ball entering means can be matched at the end of the second specific game. On top of that, since the specific processing is performed at the end of the second specific game, the specific processing can be executed in the middle of the special game state. As a result, it is possible to quickly grasp the abnormality of the remaining ball, and it is possible to prevent the damage to the amusement park from becoming large when a fraudulent act is performed. Further, since the specific process is not executed at the end of the first specific game in which the carry-over is allowed, it is possible to suppress the erroneous determination of the remaining ball abnormality.

Feature B6. In the special game state, the specific game can be executed up to a predetermined specific number of times.
The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the specific game at least one before the specific number of times is the second specific game.

Even if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game immediately before the specific number of times passes through the passing portion in the specific game of the specific number of times, the next specific game is not executed. , There is little merit of the player who allows the carry-over of the game ball in the specific game immediately before the specific number of times. Taking advantage of such characteristics, in this configuration, the specific game immediately before the specific number of times is set as a specific game in which carry-over is restricted, and the specific process is executed at the end of the specific game. This makes it possible to execute the specific process in the middle of the special gaming state without damaging the interests of the player.

Feature B7. At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is discharged from the variable ball entry means in a predetermined region (entrance guide section 215) that is upstream of the passing portion. Retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) that can be retained without any problem, and
A retention release means (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) for releasing the retention so that the game ball in the predetermined region can pass through the passing portion in the second specific game.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B4 to B6.

According to the above configuration, it can be a practically preferable mode in realizing the carry-over of the game ball. In particular, after the end of the first specific game, how long the game ball remains in the variable ball entry means can be controlled by the release timing of the retention release means. As a result, the game ball can be carried over to the second specific game even if the staying time is not earned by expanding the staying area or extending the ball passage, and the enlargement of the variable ball entry means and the complicated configuration are suppressed. It will be possible. Further, by providing the retention release means, the game ball can be carried over to the second specific game without depending on the timing at which the retention occurs. For example, if the game ball is carried over to the second specific game only when the stagnation occurs at a specific timing, the player needs to pay attention to the timing when the stagnation occurs, and the attention is easily distracted. Become. In this respect, according to this configuration, such consideration becomes unnecessary, and the game can be concentrated on staying.

Feature B8. It is characterized by having an abnormality response means (a function of executing a game stop process by the main control device 81) to execute an abnormality response process (game stop process) when a residual ball abnormality is found as a result of the specific process. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B7.

According to the above configuration, when the remaining ball abnormality is found, the abnormality response process is executed, so that it is possible to suppress fraudulent activities.

Feature B9. At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game that is executed earlier among the plurality of specific games is placed in a predetermined area (entrance guide unit 215) in the variable ball entry means. ), A retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) capable of retaining the ball without discharging it from the variable ball entry means.
A release means (shutter by the main control device 81) for releasing the stagnation so that the game ball in the predetermined area is discharged from the variable ball entry means in the second specific game executed after the first specific game. Function to open 221) and
Equipped with
The abnormality handling means according to the feature B8, wherein the abnormality handling means includes a means for executing the abnormality handling process without canceling the retention by the staying means when the remaining ball abnormality is grasped. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, since the stagnation is not released when the abnormality response process is canceled, it is possible to secure an opportunity for a staff member or the like of the game hall to be present with the stagnation ball remaining. As a result, when it is confirmed that the clerk or the like is not a fraudulent act, it is possible to relieve the player by utilizing the stagnant ball.

Feature B10. It is provided with an abnormality release means (a function of executing the main process by the main control device 81) for canceling the abnormality response process executed by the abnormality response means.
The abnormality canceling means is
When a specific operation is performed (when the power switch 92b is operated without pressing the RAM erase switch 98a), the first means for canceling the abnormality handling process by preventing the retention from being released, and
When an operation different from the specific operation is performed (when the RAM erasing switch 98a is pressed and the power switch 92b is operated), the stagnation is released and the abnormality handling process is released. 2 means and
The gaming machine according to the feature B9, which is characterized by having.

According to the above configuration, by changing the operation mode, it is possible to select whether or not to leave the stagnant ball and cancel the abnormality handling process. As a result, when it is confirmed by a staff member of the game hall whether or not the cause of the residual ball abnormality is fraudulent activity, it is possible to change the response according to the confirmation result.

Feature B11. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry control means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the main control device 81). When,
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means.
Round game execution means (round game) for executing a round game (round game) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once under a predetermined condition (the second open / close execution mode is started or the continuation condition is satisfied). (Function to execute game state transition processing by the main controller 81) and
A first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the variable entry means, and
A second detection means (V winning sensor 192, a sensor for disconnection 193) capable of detecting the ejection of a game ball from the variable ball entry means, and
Specific processing execution means (by the main control device 81) that executes specific processing for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means. Function to execute the remaining ball determination process) and
Equipped with
When the round game is executed a plurality of times, the specific process executing means does not perform each separate specific process for each of the round games, and one specific process is performed for the plurality of round games. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute processing.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as that of the above feature B1 can be obtained. In this feature, the "round game" means that "the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means has reached a predetermined upper limit, or the period or number of times that the variable ball entry means is the second aspect". Can be expressed as "a game that ends based on the fact that has reached a predetermined upper limit value". Further, each configuration described in any of the above features B1 to B10 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature B12. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means (controlling process and opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect is performed. Function to execute) and
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means.
Predetermined conditions (in the case of a round game, the second open / close execution mode is started or the continuation condition is satisfied, and in the case of the first open / close execution mode, the normal opening result is based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39. (Become a big hit in the case of the second opening / closing execution mode), the specific game (round game, first opening / closing execution mode, second opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once is executed. Specific game execution means (function to execute game control processing and game state transition processing by the main control device 81) and
A first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the variable entry means, and
A second detection means (V winning sensor 192, a sensor for disconnection 193) capable of detecting the ejection of a game ball from the variable ball entry means, and
Specific processing execution means (by the main control device 81) that executes specific processing for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means. Function to execute the remaining ball determination process) and
Equipped with
The specific process executing means executes the specific process for the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means and the discharge of the entered game ball in the specific game at a specific timing after the end of the specific game. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration that allows it to be played.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game is executed in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once, in which the variable ball entry means is the first aspect, and the game ball is inserted into the variable ball entry means. When the ball is played, the player is given a privilege. In this case, a specific process for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means is executed based on the detection results of the first and second detection means. As a result, the entry and exit of the game ball to the variable ball entry means is monitored, and the act of illegally obtaining a privilege is suppressed.

Normally, the specific process for specifying the remaining state is performed at the end of the specific game, but in this case, it is required that the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls match at the end of the specific game. Therefore, all the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game must be discharged in the specific game, and the degree of freedom in the game design is limited. In this respect, according to this configuration, since the specific process is executed at a specific timing after the end of the specific game, it is sufficient that the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls correspond at the specific timing. As a result, the specific game can be ended with the game ball remaining in the variable ball entry means, and the degree of freedom in the game design can be increased.

Feature B13. As the variable ball entry control, a first control mode (opening / closing patterns P1 and P2) and a second control mode (short opening mode) in which a game ball is less likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first control mode. Have and
In the second specific game executed after the first specific game when the specific process is executed after the first specific game executed first among the plurality of specific games, the second specific game is executed. The gaming machine according to feature B12, wherein the specific process can be executed in a situation where the variable ball entry control is performed according to a control mode.

Considering the smooth progress of the game, it is preferable to execute the specific process and then execute the specific game in parallel. In this respect, the above configuration includes a second control mode as one mode of variable ball entry control, and is configured to perform specific processing during the execution period of the control mode. When the variable ball entry control is performed in the second control mode, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It can be suppressed from occurring. That is, according to this configuration, the specific process can be executed during the second specific game, and the smooth progress of the game can be promoted.

Feature B14. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means (controlling process and opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect is performed. Function to execute) and
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means.
Under a predetermined condition (becoming a big hit), the round game (round game, first opening / closing execution mode, second opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once can be executed a plurality of times. The game state transition means (function to execute the game state transition process by the main control device 81) to shift to the special game state (second open / close execution mode), and
A first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the variable entry means, and
A second detection means (V winning sensor 192, a sensor for disconnection 193) capable of detecting the ejection of a game ball from the variable ball entry means, and
Specific processing execution means (by the main control device 81) that executes specific processing for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means. Function to execute the remaining ball determination process) and
Means for restricting the execution of the specific process in the predetermined round game executed in the specific game state (the remaining ball determination for each round game is not executed, or the remaining ball at the end of the second to fourth round games). A function that does not execute the judgment),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the game shifts to a special game state, and when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the player is given a privilege. In this case, a specific process for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means is executed based on the detection results of the first and second detection means. As a result, the entry and exit of the game ball to the variable ball entry means is monitored, and the act of illegally obtaining a privilege is suppressed.

Normally, the specific process for specifying the remaining state is performed for each round game, but in this case, it is required that the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls match at the end of the specific game. Therefore, all the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game must be discharged in the round game, and the degree of freedom in the game design is limited. In this respect, according to this configuration, since the execution of the specific process is restricted in the predetermined round game in the specific game state, the round game can be ended with the game ball remaining in the variable ball entry means. The degree of freedom in game design can be increased. Further, since the execution frequency of the specific process can be reduced, the processing load of the specific process can be reduced. In addition, each configuration described in any one of the above-mentioned features B1 to B13 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature B15. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means (controlling process and opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect is performed. Function to execute) and
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means.
A first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the variable entry means, and
A second detection means (V winning sensor 192, a sensor for disconnection 193) capable of detecting the ejection of a game ball from the variable ball entry means, and
Specific processing execution means (by the main control device 81) that executes specific processing for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means. Function to execute the remaining ball determination process) and
Equipped with
When the variable ball entry control is executed a plurality of times, the specific process execution means does not perform each separate specific process for each variable ball entry control, and the variable ball entry control is performed a plurality of times. On the other hand, a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be capable of executing one of the specific processes.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as that of the above feature B1 can be obtained. Further, each configuration described in any of the above features B1 to B14 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the features B1 to B15, any one of the features A1 to A18, the features C1 to C14, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F16, and the features G1 to G9 is used. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the above individually, or it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry control means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the main control device 81). When,
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means.
Equipped with
As the specific game in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once, the first specific game (first open / close execution mode) executed by the first condition and the first specific game are more advantageous to the player. It has a second specific game (second open / close execution mode) executed under a second condition different from the first condition.
The second condition is that the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game passes through the passing portion (V winning sensor 192).
At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the second specific game is placed in a predetermined area (for entrance) upstream of the passage portion until a specific timing after the end of the second specific game. Specific means that can be retained in the guide unit 215) (second distribution member 310, shutter 221 and warp passage 210, a function of controlling the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221 by the main control device 81). When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, in order to generate a second specific game that is advantageous to the player, it is necessary to insert the game ball into the variable ball entry means and allow the game ball to pass through the passing portion. Under such circumstances, in this configuration, at least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the second specific game can be retained in the variable ball entry means even after the end of the second specific game. It has become. According to this configuration, after the end of the second specific game, even if the game ball is not inserted into the variable ball entry means, the game ball exists in the variable ball entry means, and the game ball passes through the passing portion. By passing through, a new second specific game is executed. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to generate a new second specific game by the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means during the second specific game, and the interest is improved.

Feature C2. When the second specific game is completed, the means (processes S1905 and S1906 by the main control device 81) for causing the stagnation to occur and the stagnation not to occur are executed. The gaming machine according to feature C1, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the above configuration, the game ball does not always stay at the end of the second specific game. As a result, it is possible to add fun to enjoy whether or not the stagnation can be generated at the end of the second specific game, and the interest is improved as compared with the case where the second specific game is only vaguely digested. ..

Feature C3. The specific means provides means (a function of executing the process of step S3009 by the main control device 81) to release the stagnation regardless of the game situation when the specific timing is reached after the end of the second specific game. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, characterized in that it is provided.

In the above configuration, when the specific timing after the second specific game is reached, the retention of the game ball is released regardless of the game situation at that time. Therefore, in the gaming machine, the timing at which the retention release ball passes through the passing portion and the second 1 The timing is not adjusted with the execution timing of the specific game. For this reason, there is room for the player to generate the first specific game so as to match the timing at which the retention release ball passes through the passing portion, which makes it possible to give fun to enjoy whether or not both timings match. It becomes. In this feature, "regardless of the game status" may be paraphrased as "regardless of the execution status of the first specific game".

Feature C4. The feature C3 is characterized by comprising a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the predetermined notification suggesting the specific timing or the period until the specific timing is performed by the predetermined notification means. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when there is a stagnant ball at the end of the second specific game, the timing at which the stagnant ball passes through the passing portion can be predicted by referring to the predetermined notification. As a result, a game in which the first specific game is generated so as to match the predicted timing is created, and the interest is improved.

In addition to or in addition to the feature C4, "specific notification suggesting the elapsed status of the period up to the specific timing or the elapsed period after the end of the second specific game is performed by a predetermined notification means. In addition, the notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means is provided. ” Also in this case, by referring to the specific notification, the timing at which the stagnant ball passes through the passing portion can be predicted, and the same effect as that of the feature C4 can be obtained. When this feature is provided in addition to the feature C4, the specific notification may be performed by the same notification means as the notification means on which the predetermined notification is performed, or may be performed by another notification means.

Feature C5. A game ball launched by the launching means can enter the ball, and the ball entry portion (operating openings 38, 39) that triggers the start of the first specific game.
When a game ball enters the ball entry portion during the execution of the second specific game, the holding means (holding ball storage area 114b) capable of suspending the execution of the start trigger corresponding to the ball entry. When,
When the hold is present at the end of the second specific game, the means (data setting process by the main control device 81) capable of executing the first specific game based on the hold after the end of the second specific game. Function to execute) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4.

According to the above configuration, if there is a hold at the end of the second specific game, the hold can be used to generate the first specific game, while if there is no hold, the game ball is put into the ball entry section. The first specific game cannot be generated unless it is made to occur. That is, when the hold is caused, the generation of the first specific game can be facilitated as compared with the case where the hold is not made, and the game can be advanced advantageously. Further, in the above configuration, if a ball enters the ball during the execution of the second specific game, a hold occurs. As a result, in the second specific game, it is possible to simultaneously provide the enjoyment of inserting the game ball into the variable ball entry means and the enjoyment of causing the game ball to enter the ball entry portion to cause a hold.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the ball entry portion is arranged on the downstream side of the variable ball entry means.

According to the above configuration, since the ball entry portion is arranged on the downstream side of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of causing a hold by the spilled ball from the variable ball entry means in the second specific game. .. As a result, the player can be interested in the game ball that has not entered the variable ball entry means, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Feature C7. When the first condition is satisfied and the first result (the value of the acquired open type counter CS is 50 to 99) after the end of the second specific game, the first specific game is performed at the first timing (. When the execution is performed after the lapse of the opening waiting time of 2 sec), while the first condition is satisfied and the second result (the value of the acquired open type counter CS is 0 to 49) different from the first result. 1. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the first specific game when the first condition is satisfied is diversified. In this case, even if the first condition is satisfied by predicting the timing at which the retention release ball passes through the passing portion, it becomes difficult to match the passing timing with the execution timing of the first specific game. As a result, it is possible to suppress aiming and ensure the fairness of the game.

Feature C8. A game ball launched by the launching means can enter the ball, and the ball entry portion (operating openings 38, 39) that triggers the start of the first specific game.
When a game ball enters the ball entry portion during the execution of the second specific game, the holding means (holding ball storage area 114b) capable of suspending the execution of the start trigger corresponding to the ball entry. When,
When the hold is present at the end of the second specific game, the first specific game execution means (main control device) capable of executing the first specific game based on the hold after the end of the second specific game. Function to execute data setting processing by 81) and
Equipped with
When the first specific game based on the hold is executed at the first timing (after the lapse of the opening waiting time of 2 sec), the retention release ball released from the retention passes through the passing portion in the first specific game. When the first state is passable or easy to pass, and the second timing different from the first timing (after the elapse of the opening waiting time of 0.5 sec) is executed, the retention release ball is the first specific game. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be in a second state in which the passing portion cannot pass through or is harder to pass through than in the first state.

According to the above configuration, if there is a hold at the end of the second specific game, the hold can be used to generate the first specific game, while if there is no hold, the game ball is put into the ball entry section. The first specific game cannot be generated unless it is made to occur. That is, when the hold is caused, the generation of the first specific game can be facilitated as compared with the case where the hold is not made, and the game can be advanced advantageously. However, when the first specific game based on the hold is executed at the first timing, the second specific game is likely to occur, but when the first specific game is executed at the second timing, the second specific game is less likely to occur. That is, if there is a hold at the end of the second specific game, the consecutive villas of the second specific game are not guaranteed, and the player cannot be distracted even if the game ball is retained and the hold is caused. Will be. As a result, it is possible to keep paying attention to the development of the game after the second specific game is completed, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C9. A function of executing pre-reading by a pre-specifying means (main control device 81) that specifies whether or not the first specific game based on the hold is executed at the first timing before the execution of the start trigger based on the hold. )When,
When it is specified by the prior identification means that the first specific game is executed at the first timing, the specific notification is performed by the predetermined notification means before the end of the second specific game. A notification control means that controls the predetermined notification means, and
The gaming machine according to the feature C8, which is characterized by having.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to play the second specific game after the player knows that if the game ball stays at the end of the second specific game, the possibility of the consecutive villa is high. Become. As a result, it is possible to significantly increase the motivation to have a stagnation at the end of the second specific game, and it is possible to further improve the degree of attention to the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means.

Feature C10. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, wherein after the end of the second specific game, the gaming ball staying in the variable ball entry means can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the player can visually grasp the presence or absence of stagnation, and when stagnation occurs, it is possible to effectively arouse the expectation that a new second specific game will occur.

Feature C11. A first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the variable entry means, and
A second detection means (V winning sensor 192, a sensor for disconnection 193) capable of detecting the ejection of a game ball from the variable ball entry means, and
Specific processing execution means (by the main control device 81) that executes specific processing for specifying the remaining state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means. A function to execute the remaining ball determination process), and
The specific processing executing means performs the specific processing for the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means and the discharge of the entered game ball in the second specific game, and the staying game ball performs the variable entry. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C10, which comprises means to be executed after being discharged from the means.

According to the above configuration, even when the second specific game ends with the game ball remaining in the variable ball entry means, the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls to the variable ball entry means can be matched in the specific process. It becomes possible to appropriately determine the remaining sphere.

Feature C12. The specific process execution means has a function of executing the process of step S3010 by the means (main control device 81) for executing the specific process when a predetermined determination waiting period (6 sec) has elapsed after the end of the second specific game. )
The gaming machine according to feature C11, wherein the predetermined determination waiting period is longer than the period until the stagnant gaming ball is discharged from the variable ball entering means.

In the above configuration, the specific process is executed according to the elapse of the determination waiting period after the second specific game is completed, and the staying ball is discharged from the variable ball entry means during the determination waiting period. It is said that the period is longer than the period until. As a result, it is possible to execute the specific process after discharging the stagnant spheres without performing the process of confirming whether or not the stagnant spheres have been discharged.

Feature C13. If the first specific game is not in progress when the determination waiting period has elapsed, the specific process executing means executes the specific process according to the elapse of the determination waiting period, while the determination waiting period has elapsed. In this case, when the first specific game is in progress, the means for executing the specific process corresponding to the end of the first specific game (processes S3012 to S3016 and S3002 to S3005 by the main control device 81 are executed. The gaming machine according to feature C12, which is characterized by having a function).

For example, in a configuration in which a specific process is performed according to the elapse of the determination waiting period when the first specific game is in progress when the determination waiting period elapses, the ball enters the variable ball entry means immediately before the elapse of the determination waiting period. However, when the game ball that has entered after the lapse of the relevant period is ejected, the specific process is executed in a state where the number of ejected balls is smaller than the number of balls entered, which causes an erroneous determination of the remaining ball abnormality. In this respect, in this configuration, if the first specific game is in progress after the determination waiting period has elapsed, the specific process is performed after the first specific game is completed, so that the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls are matched. The specific process can be executed, and the above-mentioned erroneous determination can be suppressed.

Feature C14. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry control means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the main control device 81). When,
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means.
Specific means (second distribution) capable of retaining at least one of the game balls entered into the variable entry means by the variable entry control in the variable entry means even after the variable entry control. A function of controlling the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221 by the member 310, the shutter 221 and the warp passage 210, and the main control device 81).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as that of the above feature C1 can be obtained. Further, each configuration described in any of the above features C1 to C13 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the features C1 to C14, any one of the features A1 to A18, the features B1 to B15, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F16, and the features G1 to G9 is used. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the above individually, or it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means (function during control by the main control device 81) for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect is executed. )When,
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means.
A game control by a specific game execution means (main control device 81) that executes a specific game (first open / close execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once under a predetermined condition (winning of the operating ports 38 and 39). Function to execute processing) and
Specific means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221 and warp passage) that allow at least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game to be discharged from the variable ball entry means after the specific game. 210, a function of controlling the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221 by the main control device 81), and
Equipped with
The specific means sets the discharge timing of the game ball from the variable ball entry means when the game result after the specific game is the first game result (when the first opening / closing execution mode occurs within a predetermined period). When the first timing is set and the game result after the specific game is a second game result different from the first game result (when a predetermined period elapses without the first opening / closing execution mode occurring), the first A gaming machine characterized by having a means for setting a second timing different from the first timing.

In the above configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game can be discharged from the variable ball entry means after the specific game. At that time, the ejection timing of the game ball is diversified into a plurality of timings including the first timing and the second timing, and the interest can be improved as compared with the case where the ejection timing is uniform. Further, when the game result after the specific game is the first game result, the first timing is set, and when the game result after the specific game is the second game result, the second timing is set. In this case, the game after the specific game is completed affects the ejection timing of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game. As a result, the interest in the game after the end of the specific game is increased, and it becomes possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D2. The description according to feature D1, characterized in that the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on whether the timing of discharging the game ball from the variable ball entry means is the first timing or the second timing. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to have a strong interest in whether the game result after the specific game is the first game result or the second game result, and the degree of attention to the game after the specific game is completed is increased. It will increase further.

Feature D3. After the specific game, if the result of the first game is not obtained, the result of the second game is obtained.
The feature D1 or D2, wherein the ejection of the gaming ball at the first timing is more advantageous to the player than the ejection of the gaming ball at the second timing. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the motivation to make the game result after the specific game the first game result is aroused, and the degree of attention to the game after the specific game is completed is further increased.

Feature D4. Based on the fact that the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means results in a predetermined game result (V prize), the player shifts to a special game state (second open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the specific game. Equipped with a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81).
The first game result is that the predetermined condition is satisfied by a specific timing after the end of the specific game.
When the first game result is obtained after the specific game, the specific means is carried over from the specific game in the specific game after being executed in response to the first game result. Features D1 to feature D1 to include a means for ejecting the game ball (a function of executing the processing of steps S3301 and S3302 by the main control device 81) so that the game ball can produce the predetermined game result. The gaming machine described in any of D3.

According to the above configuration, if a predetermined condition is satisfied by a specific timing after the end of the specific game, the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means in the previous specific game shifts to the special game state. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to provide an advantageous period in which it is easy to shift to the special game state after the end of the specific game. As a result, the game after the specific game becomes lively, and it becomes possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, since the advantageous period is limited to a specific timing, it is possible to create a case where the advantageous period ends when a predetermined condition is not satisfied. As a result, it is possible to play in the thrill that the advantageous period may end without satisfying the predetermined conditions, and the interest is improved.

Feature D5. A means for enabling the game ball to obtain the predetermined game result in the specific game after the game ball enters the variable ball-entry means in the specific game (the first). 2. The gaming machine according to feature D4, which is provided with a function of controlling the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 and the rotating body 201 by the distribution member 310, the rotating body 201, and the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, a predetermined game result can be obtained even in the above-mentioned specific game. In this case, as an opportunity to shift to the special game state, the first opportunity that becomes the predetermined game result in the previous specific game and the predetermined condition are satisfied by the specific timing, and the predetermined game result is obtained in the later specific game. A second opportunity and multiple opportunities can be provided. Normally, the transition to the special game state is limited to the case where a predetermined game result is obtained in one specific game, but according to this configuration, there is room to shift to the special game state even after the end of the specific game. It will be left behind and the interest will improve.

Feature D6. The predetermined condition is described in the feature D4 or D5, which is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry portions (operating openings 38, 39) provided in the game area. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, since a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the entry of the ball into the entry portion, interest in the movement and whereabouts of the game ball on the game area increases after the end of the specific game, and the player sees them. It can enhance the fun to enjoy. Further, the configuration of the feature D4 or D5 can be realized by utilizing the existing control program, and the program change can be suppressed to a small extent. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming machine design due to the program change.

Feature D7. The specific means is
At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable entry means can be retained in a predetermined area (entrance guide portion 215) in the variable entry means without being discharged from the variable entry means. (Function of closing the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) and
It is provided with a retention release means (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) for releasing the retention.
The stagnation release means includes means for releasing the stagnation so that when the first game result is obtained after the specific game, the stagnation is released so as to obtain the predetermined game result in the later specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D4 to D6.

According to the above configuration, no matter when the player satisfies the predetermined condition up to the specific timing, the retention release timing (variable game ball) in the gaming machine so that the predetermined result is obtained in the later specific game. The timing of ejection from the ball entry means) is controlled. As a result, the player does not have to worry about the timing when the condition is satisfied, and can concentrate on satisfying the predetermined condition.

In addition, when this feature was applied to the above feature D5, (1) the predetermined game result could be obtained in the previous specific game, and (2) the predetermined game result was not obtained in the previous specific game. , The game ball could be retained, (3) the predetermined game result was not obtained in the previous specific game, and the game ball could not be retained, and so on. It is possible to expand the range of enjoyment compared to conventional gaming machines, which have only alternative gaming characteristics as to whether or not a predetermined gaming result is obtained.

Feature D8. It is more advantageous for the player to eject the game ball at the first timing than to eject the game ball at the second timing.
Features D1 to D7 characterized by comprising state means for setting the state after the specific game into a first state and a second state in which the degree of expectation of the first game result is relatively high or low. The gaming machine described in any of.

In the above configuration, the first game result is advantageous to the player, and the first state and the second state in which the degree of expectation is relatively high or low are provided, so that the game after the specific game is suppressed from becoming monotonous. However, it becomes possible to improve the interest.

Feature D9. The first game result is that the predetermined condition is satisfied by a specific timing after the end of the specific game.
The gaming machine according to feature D8, wherein the period until the specific timing is different between the first state and the second state.

According to the above configuration, if the period until the specific timing is long, the expectation of the first game result is high, and if it is short, the expectation is low, so that the player can easily understand and diversify the expectation.

Feature D10. Features D4 to feature D4 to include a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the predetermined notification suggesting the specific timing or the period until the specific timing is performed by the predetermined notification means. The gaming machine described in any of D9.

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the specific timing by referring to the predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to recognize when a predetermined condition should be satisfied, and playability is improved.

In addition to or in addition to the feature D10, "specific notification suggesting the elapsed status of the period up to the specific timing or the elapsed period after the end of the second specific game is performed by a predetermined notification means. In addition, the notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means is provided. ” In this case, by referring to the specific notification, the remaining period until the specific timing can be grasped, and the tension that the advantageous period may end without the result of the first game can be effectively agitated. When this feature is provided in addition to the feature D10, the specific notification may be performed by the same notification means as the notification means on which the predetermined notification is performed, or may be performed by another notification means.

Feature D11. Based on the fact that the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means results in a predetermined game result (V prize), the player shifts to a special game state (second open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the specific game. Equipped with a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81).
The specific means is
At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable entry means can be retained in a predetermined area (entrance guide portion 215) in the variable entry means without being discharged from the variable entry means. (Function of closing the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) and
A retention release means (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) for releasing the retention based on the number of times of the specific game reaching a predetermined predetermined number, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D10, characterized in that the gaming ball whose retention is released by the retention release means is configured to be capable of producing the predetermined game result.

In the above configuration, when the number of specific games reaches a predetermined number of times, the stagnation is released, and the stagnation release ball produces a predetermined game result, and the game shifts to the special game state. As a result, it is possible to provide relief when the specific game is repeated many times without shifting to the special game state, and the playability is improved.

Feature D12. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means (function during control by the main control device 81) for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect is executed. )When,
A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means.
Specific means (second distribution member 310, shutter) capable of ejecting at least one of the game balls entered into the variable entry means by the variable entry control from the variable entry means after the variable entry control. 221), the warp passage 210, the function of controlling the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221 by the main control device 81), and
Equipped with
The specific means sets the discharge timing of the game ball from the variable ball entry means when the game result after the variable ball entry control is the first game result (when the first opening / closing execution mode occurs within a predetermined period). ) Is set as the first timing, and the game result after the variable ball entry control is the second game result different from the first game result (when the predetermined period elapses without the first opening / closing execution mode occurring). In addition, the gaming machine is provided with a means for setting a second timing different from the first timing.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as that of the above feature D1 can be obtained. Further, each configuration described in any of the above features D1 to D11 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the above features D1 to D12, any one of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C14, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F16, and features G1 to G9 is used. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the above individually, or it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry control means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the main control device 81). When,
Under a predetermined condition (becoming a big hit), the player shifts to a special game state (second open / close execution mode) in which the specific game (round game) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once can be executed a plurality of times. Game state transition means (function to execute game state transition processing by the main control device 81) and
It is possible to allow a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game to stay in a predetermined area (entrance guide portion 215) in the variable ball entry means without being discharged from the variable ball entry means. (Function of closing the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) and
A retention release means (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main control device 81) for releasing the retention so that the game ball in the predetermined region is discharged from the variable ball entry means after the specific game.
In the first specific game (3rd to 7th rounds), which is one of the specific games executed a plurality of times in the special game state, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is the game ball. In the second specific game (12 rounds to 16 rounds), which is easily retained by the retention means and is different from the first specific game, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means rather than the first specific game is the retention means. Specific means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1905 and S1906 by the main control device 81) to make it less likely to be retained.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game can be left in the variable ball entry means even after the end of the specific game. That is, it is possible to cause a case where a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is discharged from the variable ball entry means across a specific game, and it is possible to provide a novel game property. In this case, for example, if the easiness of stagnation by the stagnation means (in other words, the easiness of carrying over the game ball) is standardized, the carry-over of the game ball becomes a daily routine, and the special game state is changed. It can be a game that only digests. In this respect, in this configuration, the first specific game is likely to be retained by the retention means, and the second specific game is less likely to be retained, so that the ease of carrying over the game ball can be diversified. This makes it possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E2. A distribution means (second distribution member 310) capable of distributing a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to the retention means side and a side different from the retention means side.
A distribution control means for controlling the distribution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1905 and S1906 by the main control device 81) and
Equipped with
The distribution means is controlled so that the distribution mode of the distribution means is common between the first specific game and the second specific game.
Described in feature E1 characterized in that the variable ball entry control is executed so that the ease of entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means differs between the first specific game and the second specific game. Gaming machine.

In the above configuration, the distribution mode of the distribution means is shared between the first specific game and the second specific game, and the susceptibility to retention is different by the variable ball entry control. In this case, it is not necessary to finely set the distribution mode of the distribution means and the execution mode of the variable ball entry control in each specific game, and it is sufficient to set only the latter. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load required for control and the work load when designing the gaming machine.

In addition, the following effects are expected from the above configuration. In a configuration in which the game ball is carried over due to the stagnation, the player's attention is likely to be focused on whether or not the stagnation occurs. In this case, it is assumed that the player has a strong interest in the distribution means that affects the presence or absence of stagnation and is paying close attention to the movement. Under such circumstances, if the movement of the sorting means is different, the player may notice it and may be awakened by understanding that the difference in the easiness of staying is pre-engineered. In this respect, in this configuration, since the movement of the distribution means is common to each specific game, such awareness can be suppressed. As a result, it becomes easy to feel that the difference in the ease of staying is due to chance, and it is possible to suitably provide the fun of enjoying the behavior of the game ball.

Feature E3. The specific game can be divided into a plurality of game sections according to the number of times the variable ball entry control is executed.
The distribution means is controlled so that the distribution mode of the distribution means in each of the game sections is common between the first specific game and the second specific game.
The variable ball entry control is executed so that the ease of entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means differs between the first specific game and the second specific game in at least one of the game sections. The gaming machine according to the feature E2.

In the above configuration, the first specific game and the second specific game have the same distribution mode of the distribution means in each game section, while the variable ball entry control mode is different in at least one of the game sections. It has become. In this case, if a ball entry control mode that facilitates entry into the variable ball entry means is combined with the game section in which the distribution means easily distributes the game ball to the retention means side, it is possible to generate a characteristic in which retention is likely to occur. By combining the modes that are difficult to stay, it is possible to generate the characteristic that the retention is hard to occur. That is, the susceptibility to retention can be easily changed, and the design burden of variable ball entry control can be reduced.

Feature E4. A passing portion (V winning sensor 192) through which a game ball entered into the variable entry means can pass is provided.
In the special game state, the next specific game can be performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing portion in the specific game.
Among the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game, the game balls that are not retained by the retention means can pass through the passing portion in the specific game, and the game balls retained by the retention means are the same. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the specific game executed after the specific game is configured to be able to pass through the passing portion.

In the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the passing portion in one specific game, the next specific game can be performed, and passing the game ball through the passing portion is the implementation condition of the next specific game. Become. Under such a situation, in this configuration, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the specific game, if the game ball is not retained by the retention means, the game ball passes through the passing portion in the specific game. It is possible, and if it is retained by the retention means, it can pass through the passing portion in a specific game later. According to such a configuration, the implementation of a specific game is achieved by a game ball entered in the immediately preceding specific game and by a game ball entered in a specific game further before the immediately preceding specific game. It is possible to create a case and provide a novel playability that has never existed before. This makes it possible to give a fresh impression to the player and improve the interest.

When this feature is applied to the feature E2 or E3, "a game ball that is not retained by the retention means can pass through the passing portion in the specific game, and the game ball retained by the retention means is the specific game. "The game ball distributed to the different side by the distribution means can pass through the passage portion in the specific game", and the distribution means can pass through the passage unit in the specific game to be executed later. The game ball distributed to the retention means side can pass through the passing portion in the specific game executed after the specific game. "

Feature E5. After the start of the specific game, a predetermined end condition (the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 is the upper limit, or the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened is the upper limit) is satisfied. The specific game ending means (a function of executing the opening process by the main control device 81) for ending the specific game is provided.
The specific game ending means is characterized in that even if the gaming ball passes through the passing portion before the ending condition is satisfied in the specific game, the specific game is continued until the ending condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in.

For example, in a configuration in which the specific game ends when the game ball passes through the passing portion, the carry-over ball from the previous specific game passes before the ball enters the variable ball entry means in the later specific game. If the player passes through the section, the specific game after that is completed without entering the ball, which may cause an inconvenience that the game cannot be sufficiently played. In this regard, according to this configuration, even if the game ball passes through the passing portion before the end condition is satisfied, the specific game is continued until the end condition is satisfied, so that the above-mentioned inconvenience is avoided and the game period is reached. Can be properly secured.

Feature E6. In the specific game (second round game) executed for the first time in the special game state, the first state (opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is less likely to be retained by the retention means. After starting with the combination of P1 and the operation pattern SA), the configuration changes to the second state (combination of the opening / closing pattern P1 and the operation pattern SB) in which the retention is more likely to occur than the first state. The gaming machine according to the feature E4 or E5.

In the first specific game, there is no specific game to be executed before that, and there is no carry-over of the game ball. Therefore, in order to carry out the next specific game, it is indispensable that the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game passes through the passing portion in the specific game. In this case, for example, if the game ball does not pass through the passing portion when the stagnation occurs, the first specific game ends in that state, the next specific game is not executed, and the stagnation ball is also wasted. It's easy to worry that it will end. In this respect, in this configuration, after starting in the first state in which retention is unlikely to occur, the game changes to the second state in which retention is likely to occur. , It becomes possible to reduce the anxiety of the player.

When this feature is applied to feature E5, the following effects are also expected. Since the specific game ends based on the establishment of the end clause, if the end condition is satisfied early, the specific game may end in a short period of time. In this case, if the configuration is such that the second state is set before the first state, the specific game ends during the second state or immediately after switching to the first state, and the game ball is passed in the first specific game. Opportunities to pass through the department may not be provided satisfactorily. In this respect, in the above configuration, since the first state is set before the second state, the opportunity to pass the game ball through the passing portion in the first specific game is suitably secured, and the next specific game is easily carried out. ..

Feature E7. A distribution means (second distribution member 310) capable of distributing a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to the retention means side and a side different from the retention means side.
The distribution means is divided into a first distribution mode (distribution state) in which the game ball can be distributed to the retention means side and a second distribution mode (non-distribution state) in which the game ball can be distributed to the different side. Distribution control means (function to switch and control the second distribution member 310 by the main control device 81) and
Equipped with
One of the features E1 to E6, wherein the distribution control means includes means for switching the distribution means to the first distribution mode after the retention is released by the retention release means. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, after the retention of the game ball is released, distribution to the retention means side is permitted. In this case, the game ball can be guided to the retention means side after a vacancy is secured in the predetermined area where the game ball is retained. As a result, even though the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can be directed toward the retention means side, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the retention is hindered by the game ball that has already accumulated. become.

Feature E8. The retention release means does not release the retention under the situation where the variable ball entry means is the first aspect, and releases the retention under the situation where the variable ball entry means is the second aspect. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E7, characterized in that it is provided with means for performing the game.

In the first aspect, in which the game ball can or easily enters the variable ball entry means, the player's consciousness tends to concentrate on whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. Therefore, if the stagnation is released under the situation described in the first aspect, the player may miss the release of the stagnation. In this respect, in this configuration, since the stagnation is released under the situation where the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter into the variable ball entry means, it is possible to suppress the oversight of the release of the stagnation.

For each configuration of the above features E1 to E8, any one of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D12, features F1 to F16, and features G1 to G9 is used. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the above individually, or it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means (controlling process and opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect is performed. Function to execute) and
Predetermined conditions (in the case of a round game, the second open / close execution mode is started or the continuation condition is satisfied, and in the case of the first open / close execution mode, the normal opening result is based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39. (Become a big hit in the case of the second opening / closing execution mode), the specific game (round game, first opening / closing execution mode, second opening / closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once is executed. Specific game execution means (function to execute game control processing and game state transition processing by the main control device 81) and
When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, the first specific game is performed by the game ball that has entered the variable entry means in the first specific game that is executed first among the plurality of specific games. Specific means for changing the degree of advantage for the player in the second specific game executed after the specific game (a function of storing the game ball in the opening / closing guide portion 203 by the opening / closing member 400).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game is executed in which the variable ball entry control, in which the variable ball entry means is the first aspect, is performed at least once. Normally, whether or not a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means results in an advantageous result is terminated with the end of the specific game in which the entry occurs. The configuration is such that the degree of advantage in the second specific game later changes depending on the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game. As a result, it becomes possible to play games in cooperation with the specific games of the future, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the conventional gaming machine in which the games are independent for each specific game.

Feature F2. When the specific means has a predetermined game result (result in which the game ball is distributed to the exit guide portion 203) when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, the second specific means is specified. The degree of advantage in the game is set to the first degree (a state in which the V winning rate is increased by distribution to the exit guide portion 203), and even if the game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, the above-mentioned If the predetermined game result is not obtained, the advantage in the second specific game is the second degree, which is more disadvantageous than the first degree (the V winning rate does not increase because there is no distribution to the exit guide unit 203). The gaming machine according to the feature F1, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a means (a function of storing a gaming ball in the opening / closing guide portion 203 by an opening / closing member 400).

For example, if it is determined that it will be advantageous when the ball enters the variable ball entry means, the player will be satisfied when the ball is completed and the player will be interested in the game ball after the ball has entered. It may be diluted. In this case, even if the configuration of the variable ball entry means is devised to make the movement of the game ball after the ball enter the ball interesting, a sufficient effect cannot be expected. In this respect, in the present configuration, in order to be advantageous in the second specific game, it is required that the ball entering the variable ball entering means is not enough and a predetermined game result is obtained. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game ball after entering the ball.

Feature F3. A plurality of receiving sections including at least one first receiving section (V winning opening guide section 204) and at least one second receiving section (outward opening guiding section 203) for the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means. Distributing means (rotating body 201) and
A privilege (execution of the next round game) is given to the player when the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit, while the privilege is not given even if the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit. Granting means (function to execute round update processing by the main controller 81) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the predetermined gaming result is that the gaming ball that has entered the variable ball-entry means in the first specific game is distributed to the second receiving unit.

In the above configuration, the privilege is given when the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit, and the privilege is not given when the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit. Normally, when the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit without privilege grant, the player feels disappointed, but in this configuration, the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit in the first specific game. And, it is a configuration that is advantageous in the second specific game later. As a result, it is possible to realize a game playability that the player is pleased with regardless of whether the game ball is distributed to either the first receiving unit or the second receiving unit, and it is possible to suitably increase the motivation for the game. In addition, since the second receiving unit, which was conventionally recognized only as disadvantageous, functions as a receiving unit that enhances the degree of advantage, it is possible to give unexpectedness and give a fresh impression to the player. Become.

Features F4. The specific means enters the variable ball entry means in the second specific game when the game ball entered in the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is distributed to the second receiving unit. The probability that the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit is defined as the first probability (probability when the V winning rate increases due to the distribution to the exit guide unit 203), and the variable ball entering means is used in the first specific game. The first probability is the probability that a game ball that has entered the variable ball-entry means in the second specific game will be distributed to the first receiving unit when the ball that has entered cannot be distributed to the second receiving unit. A means (a function of storing a game ball in the exit guide portion 203 by the opening / closing member 400) as a second probability (probability when there is no distribution to the exit guide portion 203 and the V winning rate does not increase) is lower than the second probability. The gaming machine according to the feature F3, which is characterized by being provided.

According to the above configuration, if the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit in the first specific game, the game ball is easily distributed to the first receiving unit in the second specific game later, and in the second specific game. It will be easier to get benefits.

Feature F5. The specific means is a receiving means (game ball is stored) that makes it impossible or difficult to accept a new game ball to the second receiving unit when a predetermined number of game balls are received in the second receiving unit. It is equipped with a function to close the exit guide part 203).
Described in the feature F3 or F4, wherein the second specific game can be executed in a state where the acceptance of a new game ball to the second receiving unit is impossible or difficult by the receiving means. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when a predetermined number of game balls are accepted by the second receiving unit, new game balls cannot be accepted by the second receiving unit. In this case, in the plurality of receiving units including the first and second receiving units, the total number of receiving units that can accept the game ball decreases, and the ratio of the first receiving unit increases accordingly. Then, since the second specific game is executed later in a state where the acceptance of a new game ball is impossible or difficult, the probability of distribution to the first receiving unit in the second specific game increases, and it is easy to acquire the privilege. Become. In this feature, "difficulty in accepting a new game ball for the second receiving section" means that it is not absolutely impossible, although it is basically not accepted, and as a specific example, In the seventh embodiment, there is a situation in which the game ball may be further placed on the game ball stored in the outlet guide unit 203.

Feature F6. The plurality of receiving units include a third receiving unit that is different from any of the first receiving unit and the second receiving unit.
The privilege granting means is configured so that the privilege is not granted even if the game ball is distributed to the third receiving unit.
The gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized in that even if a gaming ball is accepted by the third receiving section, a new gaming ball can be accepted by the third receiving section.

In the above configuration, even if the game ball is distributed to the third receiving unit, the privilege is not given, and it is not advantageous in the second specific game. The existence of such a third receiving unit can emphasize the superiority of the second receiving unit. In addition, since the third receiving section is a disappointing receiving section for the player, it is assumed that the psychology of avoiding distribution to the third receiving section works. As a result, it is expected that the movement of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means will be closely watched, and it will be possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game ball.

Feature F7. When the first specific game is executed, it is provided with a means for ending the first specific game based on the condition that a predetermined end condition is satisfied (a function of executing an open middle process by the main control device 81).
The predetermined end condition includes that the number of game balls entered into the variable entry means reaches a predetermined predetermined number (9).
The gaming machine according to feature F5 or F6, wherein the total number of gaming balls that can be accepted by the second receiving unit is larger than the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball becomes unacceptable to the second receiving unit easily occur, and it is possible to maintain a long period during which the game ball can be distributed to the second receiving unit.

Feature F8. As the receiving means, when a game ball is received in the second receiving unit, a means for storing the game ball in the second receiving unit (a function of storing the game ball in the outlet guide unit 203) is provided. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F5 to F7, wherein the second specific game can be executed in a state where the gaming ball is stored in the second receiving portion.

According to the above configuration, the game ball stored in the second receiving section closes the second receiving section, so that it is impossible or difficult for the second receiving section to accept a new game ball. That is, by utilizing the game balls distributed to the second receiving unit, it is possible to easily construct a configuration in which the above acceptance is not possible. Further, since the stored ball closes the second receiving portion, it is easy to understand visually and it is possible to facilitate the understanding of the game playability.

Features F9. It is provided with a release means (a function of releasing storage in the middle of a round game) for releasing the state in which the new game ball made by the receiving means is impossible or difficult to accept in the middle of the second specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F5 to F8.

According to the above configuration, the benefit of the game ball being distributed to the second receiving unit in the first specific game can be obtained only halfway through the second specific game. In this case, if the game ball is not distributed to the first receiving unit in a state of benefit, it is inevitable to aim for distribution to the first receiving unit under a more disadvantageous situation. As a result, the tension of the player can be raised, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the said feature F8, "a release means which cancels a state which makes it impossible or difficult to accept the new game ball made by the acceptance means in the middle of the second specific game. May be "a means for releasing the storage of the game ball in the second receiving unit in the middle of the second specific game".

Feature F10. The release means is provided with a means for performing the release (a function of releasing storage after 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round) regardless of the game situation when the specific timing is reached during the second specific game. The gaming machine according to the feature F9.

According to the above configuration, the unacceptable state is released regardless of the game situation such as the presence or absence of distribution to the first receiving unit. As a result, it is possible to effectively arouse the tension that may lose the benefit without being distributed to the first receiving section, and the interest is improved.

Features F11. The feature F10 is characterized by comprising a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the predetermined notification suggesting the specific timing or the period until the specific timing is performed by the predetermined notification means. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the player can predict the release timing of the unacceptable or difficult state. As a result, it becomes easy to grasp how long the second specific game is advantageous, and the playability is improved.

In addition to or in addition to the feature F11, "specific notification suggesting the elapsed status of the period up to the specific timing or the elapsed period after the end of the second specific game is performed by a predetermined notification means. In addition, the notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means is provided. ” Also in this case, by referring to the specific notification, the release timing of the unacceptable state can be predicted, and the same effect as that of the feature F11 can be obtained. When this feature is provided in addition to the feature F11, the specific notification may be performed by the same notification means as the notification means on which the predetermined notification is performed, or may be performed by another notification means.

Feature F12. The release means is characterized by comprising means for performing the release based on a predetermined number of balls entering the variable ball entry means in the second specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F9 to F11.

For example, if the game ball does not easily enter the variable ball entry means, the unacceptable state (advantageous state) may end without being sufficiently distributed by the distribution means. In this regard, according to this configuration, the unacceptable state continues until the number of game balls entered into the variable entry means reaches a predetermined number, so that an opportunity to receive distribution in an advantageous state is appropriately secured. can.

Feature F13. The first distribution means as the distribution means and
Upstream of the first distribution means in the variable ball entry means, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means is placed on the side different from the first distribution means side and the first distribution means side. The second distribution means (first distribution member 300) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F3 to F12, characterized in that the gaming balls distributed to the different sides by the second sorting means are configured so as not to reach the second receiving portion. ..

If it is desired to prevent the distribution to the first receiving section from becoming too simple, it is conceivable to increase the number of the second receiving section or increase the number of game balls accepted by the first second receiving section. However, the structure of the first distribution means and the second receiving portion may become complicated, which may increase the burden of designing the gaming machine. In this respect, in the above configuration, since the number of game balls toward the first distribution means is reduced by the second distribution means, the number of second receiving portions and the acceptance of the game balls to one second receiving unit are received. The number can be kept small and the configuration can be simplified. Further, since the second distribution means intervenes, the difficulty of distribution to the second receiving unit becomes high, and it is possible to enhance the sense of accomplishment when the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit.

Feature F14. It is provided with a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) to shift to a special game state (second open / close execution mode) capable of executing the specific game (round game) a plurality of times. ,
The privilege granting means is capable of executing the next specific game as the privilege when the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit in the specific game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F3 to F13.

In the above configuration, there is a special game state in which a plurality of specific games can be executed, and in the special game state, the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit in one specific game, and the next specific game is performed. Will be possible. That is, it is a condition for the next specific game to be distributed to the first receiving unit. Under such a premise, in this configuration, the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit in the first specific game, so that the game ball is easily distributed to the first receiving unit in the second specific game later. .. When the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit in the second specific game, the specific game to be executed next to the second specific game (referred to as the third specific game for convenience) can be executed. The third specific game is a specific game after the next specific game when viewed from the first specific game. That is, according to this configuration, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game has an influence on the execution of the next and subsequent specific games, and can provide a novel playability. It will be possible.

Feature F15. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry control means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the main control device 81). When,
Round game execution means (round game) for executing a round game (round game) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once under a predetermined condition (the second open / close execution mode is started or the continuation condition is satisfied). (Function to execute game state transition processing by the main controller 81) and
When the round game is executed a plurality of times, the first round game is performed by the game ball that has entered the variable ball-entry means in the first round game that is executed first among the plurality of round games. Specific means for changing the degree of advantage for the player in the second round game executed after the round game (a function of storing the game ball in the exit guide portion 203 by the opening / closing member 400).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as that of the above feature F1 can be obtained. In this feature, the "round game" means that "the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means has reached a predetermined upper limit, or the period or number of times that the variable ball entry means is the second aspect". Can be expressed as "a game that ends based on the fact that has reached a predetermined upper limit value". Further, each configuration described in any of the above features F1 to F14 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Features F16. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means (controlling process and opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect is performed. Function to execute) and
When the variable ball entry control is executed a plurality of times, a game in which the ball is entered into the variable ball entry means by the first variable ball entry control executed first among the plurality of variable ball entry controls. Specific means for changing the degree of advantage for the player in the second variable ball entry control executed after the first variable ball entry control by the ball (the opening / closing member 400 causes the game ball to be stored in the exit guide portion 203). Function) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as that of the above feature F1 can be obtained. Further, each configuration described in any of the above features F1 to F15 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the above features F1 to F16, any one of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E8, and features G1 to G9 is used. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the above individually, or it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The variable ball entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control means (controlling process and opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect is performed. Function to execute) and
A specific game execution means (game state transition process by the main control device 81) for executing a specific game (round game) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once under a predetermined condition (the condition for starting the round game is satisfied). Function to execute) and
A plurality of receiving sections including at least one first receiving section (V winning opening guide section 204) and at least one second receiving section (outward opening guiding section 203) for the game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means. Distributing means (rotating body 201) that can be distributed to
A privilege (execution of the next round game) is given to the player when the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit, while the privilege is not given even if the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit. Granting means (function to execute round update processing by the main controller 81) and
In the specific game, it is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the second receiving unit than to distribute the game ball to the first receiving unit after the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit. (A function to store game balls in the exit guide portion 203 by the opening / closing member 400, a function to increase the number of prize balls in the exit guide portion 203 rather than the V winning opening guide portion 204).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game is executed in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once, which is the first aspect of the variable ball entry means, and when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, The game ball is distributed to a plurality of receiving sections including the first receiving section and the second receiving section. Then, when the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit, the privilege is given, and when it is distributed to the second receiving unit, the privilege is not given. Normally, when a game ball is distributed to a second receiving unit without a privilege, the player feels disappointed, but in this configuration, after the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit, the first receiving unit is used. The second receiving unit is more advantageous to the player than the second receiving unit. As a result, it is possible to provide a game playability that the player is pleased with regardless of whether the game ball is distributed to either the first receiving unit or the second receiving unit, and it is possible to suitably increase the motivation for the game.

Feature G2. The privilege granting means corresponds to the distribution even if the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit in the specific game and then the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit again in the specific game. The gaming machine according to feature G1, which is characterized in that it is configured not to give the privilege.

In the above configuration, even if the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit and then the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit again, no new privilege corresponding to the distribution is given. In this case, as a result of the player being satisfied with the first distribution to the first receiving unit, the interest in the subsequent distribution is diminished, and the degree of attention to the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means during the remaining period of the specific game. May decrease. In this respect, after the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit, the second receiving unit is more advantageous to the player than the first receiving unit, so even after the first distribution to the first receiving unit is made. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means.

Further, before the first distribution to the first receiving unit is made, the first receiving unit is more advantageous than the second receiving unit because the privilege is given by the distribution to the first receiving unit, while the first After the initial distribution to the receiving unit, the second receiving unit has an advantage over the first receiving unit. That is, the advantageous relationship is reversed before and after the distribution to the first receiving unit, and two games, a game aiming at distribution to the first receiving unit and a game aiming at distribution to the second receiving unit, are one specific game. Can be realized in. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the conventional gaming machine in which the former is only guaranteed.

Feature G3. The specific means is a means for making the player more advantageous as the number of times the game balls are distributed to the second receiving unit after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving unit in the specific game (the specific means). The gaming machine according to the feature G1 or G2, characterized in that the V winning rate increases as the number of the exit guide portions 203 to which the gaming balls are distributed increases.

For example, if the configuration is such that the degree of advantage does not change even if the game balls are repeatedly distributed to the second receiving unit, if the distribution to the first receiving unit can be achieved once and then the distribution to the second receiving unit can be achieved thereafter. Interest in games tends to diminish. In this respect, in this configuration, the more the game balls are distributed to the second receiving unit, the more advantageous it is. Therefore, even after the distribution to the second receiving unit is achieved, the motivation to distribute to the second receiving unit is maintained. be able to. As a result, the game can be enjoyed until the end of the specific game, and the interest is improved.

In addition, this feature is "the second receiving part is provided a plurality, and the said specific means, after the game ball is distributed to the 1st receiving part in the said specific game, the game ball by the distribution means. A means to make the player more advantageous as the number of the second receiving portions to which the game balls are distributed increases (a function in which the V winning rate increases as the number of the exit guide portions 203 to which the game balls are distributed increases). Can be rephrased as "equipped with."

Features G4. In the specific means, when the specific game is executed a plurality of times, the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit in the first specific game executed first among the plurality of times the specific game. And, with a means to be advantageous in the second specific game executed after the first specific game (a function of handing over the state in which the game ball is stored in the exit guide portion 203 to the next round). The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G3, which is characterized by being present.

In the above configuration, the distribution to the second receiving unit in the first specific game earlier enhances the degree of advantage in the second specific game later. That is, the distribution result to the second receiving unit is reflected across the specific game, and it is possible to provide a novel game property.

Feature G5. The specific means is a receiving means (game ball is stored) that makes it impossible or difficult to accept a new game ball to the second receiving unit when a predetermined number of game balls are received in the second receiving unit. It is equipped with a function to close the exit guide part 203).
The game according to feature G4, wherein the second specific game can be executed in a state where the receiving means makes it impossible or difficult to accept a new game ball to the second receiving unit. Machine.

According to the above configuration, when a predetermined number of game balls are accepted by the second receiving unit, it becomes impossible or difficult to accept new game balls by the second receiving unit. In this case, in the plurality of receiving units including the first and second receiving units, the total number of receiving units that can accept the game ball decreases, and the ratio of the first receiving unit increases accordingly. Then, since the second specific game is executed later in a state where the acceptance of a new game ball is impossible or difficult, the probability of distribution to the first receiving unit in the second specific game increases, and it is easy to acquire the privilege. Become. In this feature, "difficulty in accepting a new game ball for the second receiving section" means that it is not absolutely impossible, although it is basically not accepted, and as a specific example, In the seventh embodiment, there is a situation in which the game ball may be further placed on the game ball stored in the outlet guide unit 203.

Feature G6. As the receiving means, when a game ball is received in the second receiving unit, a means for storing the game ball in the second receiving unit (a function of storing the game ball in the outlet guide unit 203) is provided. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to feature G5, wherein the second specific game can be executed in a state where the gaming balls are stored in the second receiving portion.

According to the above configuration, the game ball stored in the second receiving section closes the second receiving section, so that it is impossible or difficult for the second receiving section to accept a new game ball. That is, by utilizing the game balls distributed to the second receiving unit, it is possible to easily construct a configuration in which the above acceptance is not possible. Further, since the stored ball closes the second receiving portion, it is easy to understand visually and it is possible to facilitate the understanding of the game playability.

Feature G7. It is provided with a release means (a function of releasing storage in the middle of a round game) for releasing the state in which the new game ball made by the receiving means is impossible or difficult to accept in the middle of the second specific game. The gaming machine according to the feature G5 or G6, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, the benefit of the game ball being distributed to the second receiving unit in the first specific game can be obtained only halfway through the second specific game. In this case, if the game ball is not distributed to the first receiving unit in a state of benefit, it is inevitable to aim for distribution to the first receiving unit under a more disadvantageous situation. As a result, the tension of the player can be raised, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the said feature G6, "a canceling means which cancels a state which makes it impossible or difficult to accept the new game ball made by the receiving means in the middle of the second specific game. May be "a means for releasing the storage of the game ball in the second receiving unit in the middle of the second specific game".

Features G8. The first distribution means as the distribution means and
Upstream of the first distribution means in the variable ball entry means, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means is placed on the side different from the first distribution means side and the first distribution means side. The second distribution means (first distribution member 300) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G7, characterized in that the gaming balls distributed to the different sides by the second distribution means are configured so as not to reach the second receiving portion. ..

If it is desired to prevent the distribution to the first receiving section from becoming too simple, it is conceivable to increase the number of the second receiving section or increase the number of game balls accepted by the first second receiving section. However, the structure of the first distribution means and the second receiving portion may become complicated, which may increase the burden of designing the gaming machine. In this respect, in the above configuration, since the number of game balls toward the first distribution means is reduced by the second distribution means, the number of second receiving portions and the acceptance of the game balls to one second receiving unit are received. The number can be kept small and the configuration can be simplified. Further, since the second distribution means intervenes, the difficulty of distribution to the second receiving unit becomes high, and it is possible to enhance the sense of accomplishment when the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit.

Feature G9. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on a launch operation by the player, and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. ) And a variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be switched to
The game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is transferred to a plurality of receiving sections including at least one first receiving section (V winning opening guide section 204) and at least one second receiving section (outward opening guiding section 203). Sorting means (rotating body 201) and
A privilege (execution of the next round game) is given to the player when the game ball is distributed to the first receiving unit, while the privilege is not given even if the game ball is distributed to the second receiving unit. Granting means (function to execute round update processing by the main controller 81) and
After the game balls are distributed to the first receiving unit, it is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls to the second receiving unit than to distribute the game balls to the first receiving unit. Specific means (a function of storing a game ball in the opening / closing guide portion 203 by the opening / closing member 400),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as that of the above feature G1 can be obtained. Further, each configuration described in any of the above features G1 to G8 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the features G1 to G9, any one of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E8, and features F1 to F16 is used. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the above individually, or it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The technical ideas shown in the inventions of the features A to G described above may be applied to each invention of the features A to G, and some or all of them may be combined to form the features A to G. It may be applied to each invention of. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each invention of each feature group A to G.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine (ball-using rotating body-type gaming machine): Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means. The game starts with the fluctuation of the symbol, and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that generates a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and also provides a ball tray to perform a throwing process of taking in the game ball from the ball tray, and paying out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine provided with a payout device to be performed, and configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown by the throwing device.

10 ... pachinko machine, 38 ... first operating port, 39 ... second operating port, 53 ... game ball launching mechanism, 81 ... main control device, 92b ... power switch, 97 ... payout control device, 98a ... RAM erasing switch, 114b ... Hold ball storage area, 150 ... Accessory device, 179 ... Entrance sensor, 183 ... Guidance passage, 192 ... V winning sensor, 193 ... Outer sensor, 201 ... Rotating body, 203 ... Outer opening guide, 204 ... V winning Mouth guide, 210 ... Warp passage, 215 ... Entrance guide, 221 ... Shutter, 300 ... First distribution member, 310 ... Second distribution member, 400 ... Open / close member.

Claims (1)

A launching means that launches a game ball based on a launching operation by the player,
Variable entry that can be switched between the first aspect in which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter or is easy to enter, and the second aspect in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first aspect. Ball means and
A variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable ball entry control according to the second aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images